Xerox 4505 ps, 4510 ps laser printer User’s Guide
Xerox 4505/4505ps Desktop Laser Printers offer advanced features that ensure high-quality Xerox printing. With a print speed of five pages per minute, a resolution of 600 dpi and 300 dpi, and a monthly page volume of up to 10,000 pages, these printers are ideal for single-user or networked printing. Whether you're printing text documents, graphics, or photos, the Xerox 4505/4505ps will deliver professional-looking results.
advertisement
Assistant Bot
Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.
AUG-TITL Page -1 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, February 7, 1995 12:20 PM
The Xerox
4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps
Desktop Laser Printers
User’s Guide
AUG-TITL Page 0 Black,Red Tuesday, February 7, 1995 12:20 PM
Xerox Corporation
701 South Aviation Blvd.
El Segundo, CA
90245
USA
Xerox Canada, Limited
5650 Yonge Street
North York, Ontario
Canada
M2M 4G7
Americas Operations
200 First Stamford Place
Greenwich Avenue
Stamford, CT
06904-2343
USA
Rank Xerox, Limited
Parkway
Marlow
Buckinghamshire
S17 1YL
United Kingdom
Copyright
1994 Xerox Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright protection claimed includes all forms of matters of copyrightable materials and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc.
Printed in France.
Xerox
, Rank Xerox, and all product names and product numbers mentioned in this publication are trademarks.
Adobe
and PostScript
are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
TrueRes is a trademark of DP-Tek. PCL, HP, LaserJet, Intellifont, and
Resolution Enhancement Technology (RET) are trademarks of
Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM is a trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. Microsoft, Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Word, MS, and MS-DOS are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Univers is a trademark of Linotype AG or its subsidiaries. WordPerfect is a trademark of
WordPerfect Corporation. Centronics is a trademark of Centronics
Corporation. Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Incorporated. OnPage is a trademark of Computer:applications, Inc. All other product names are trademarks/ tradenames of their respective owners.
PCL
and
PCL 5e
are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company. This printer contains an emulation of the Hewlett Packard PCL 5e command language, recognizes HP PCL 5e commands, and processes these commands in a manner compatible with Hewlett Packard LaserJet printer products.
Notice
Specifications described in this publication are subject to change without notice. Use of some features may be limited by your hardware or software configuration. Contact your dealer, Xerox or Rank Xerox for details.
AUG-TOC Page 1 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
...................................................
1-1
Overview 1-2
Sharing the Printer 1-5
Memory Considerations 1-6
Chapter 2
Handling Paper
.............................................
2-1
Overview 2-3
Paper Input 2-4
Paper Output 2-5
Paper Specifications 2-6
Paper Trays 2-8
Loading Paper 2-14
Selecting a Paper Source 2-22
Chapter 3
Using the Control Panel
..............................
3-1
Overview 3-3
Control Panel Features 3-4
Navigating the Menu System 3-8
Main Menu System 3-12
Language 3-14
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
❖
i
AUG-TOC Page 2 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM
T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s
PCL Menu 3-15
PostScript Menu 3-29
Interface Menu 3-37
System Menu 3-57
Test Menu 3-61
Reset Menu 3-65
Printer Settings that Affect Memory 3-67
Chapter 4
Using Fonts
....................................................
4-1
Overview 4-3
Fonts Resident on the Printer 4-5
Adding Fonts 4-9
Selecting a Font 4-12
Downloading Fonts 4-13
Chapter 5
Adding Printer Options
...............................
5-1
Overview 5-2
Installing a SIMM 5-4
Installing a Font Card 5-19
Chapter 6
Maintaining the Printer
..............................
6-1
Overview 6-2
Replacing the EP Cartridge 6-3
Fuser Cleaning Cycle 6-9
Adjusting the Print Density 6-12
Cleaning the Printer 6-13
Transporting the Printer 6-14
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
...........................................
7-1
Overview 7-2
Displayed Control Panel Messages 7-5
Paper Jams 7-19
Printer Operational Problems 7-26
ii
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-TOC Page 3 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM
T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s
Print Quality Problems 7-29
Appendix A
Printer and Cable Specifications
..............
A-1
4505 and 4505ps Printer Specifications A-2
4510 and 4510ps Printer Specifications A-4
Cable Specifications A-7
Appendix B
Printer Commands (Escape Sequences)
...
B-1
Xerox-Unique Settings B-2
PCL Printer Commands B-3
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands B-21
Control Codes B-25
Appendix C
I/O Port Polling
..............................................
C-1
Appendix D
Ordering Information
.................................
D-1
Printer Options D-2
Additional Order Items D-7
Appendix E
Environmental Specifications
....................
E-1
Glossary
.......................................................................
GL-1
Index
........................................................................
IX-1
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
❖
iii
AUG-TOC Page 4 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM
iv
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH01 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM
Chapter 1
Introduction
1 r e t p a h C
Overview
...............................................................................
1-2
Printer Components 1-3
Factory Settings 1-4
Sharing the Printer
...............................................................
1-5
Memory Considerations
.......................................................
1-6
C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n
❖
1-1
AUG-CH01 Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM
O v e r v i e w
Overview
The Xerox 4505, 4505ps, 4510, and 4510ps Desktop Laser
Printers offer the most cost-effective, best price-performance solution to single-user or networked printing of any advanced laser printer in their class.
At
five
pages per minute for the 4505/4505ps and
ten
pages per minute for the 4510/4510ps, these printers provide technically advanced features to ensure the high quality
Xerox printing you have come to expect:
• 600 dpi and 300 dpi resolutions
• Up to 10,000 pages per month for the 4505/4505ps
• Up to 20,000 pages per month for the 4510/4510ps
• Power saver mode
• Remote User Interface (RUI)
• TrueRes, for smooth edges and enhanced resolution
• Optional lower base with 500-sheet, 250-sheet, or
30-envelope capacity
• Optional 250-sheet trays supporting a variety of paper sizes
• Multipurpose (MP) tray for single-sheet manual feeding or small quantity specialized printing
• Memory capacity up to 16 MBytes
• Small footprint
• PCL 5e emulation and PostScript Level 2 PDLs (page description languages)
• Automatic switching between PCL emulation (hereinafter referred to as PCL) and PostScript (when the PostScript option is installed)
• Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring network options, each with a variety of protocols
• Printing from up to
three
simultaneously-active ports on the 4505/4505ps and up to
five
on the 4510/4510ps
• User installable printer and options
1-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH01 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM
O v e r v i e w
Printer
Components
The key printer components are called out in Figure 1.1.
Figure 1.1
Key printer components
Output Tray
Font Card Slots
Power Switch
Control Panel
Front Cover
Multipurpose (MP)
Paper Source
250-sheet Paper Tray
Network Port 1
Network Ports 2 & 3
(4510/4510ps only)
Serial Port
Parallel Port
Power Inlet
C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n
❖
1-3
AUG-CH01 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM
O v e r v i e w
Factory
Settings
The printer is controlled by numerous settings whose values are pre-set at the factory. These values are called
factory settings
.
If the factory settings do not suit the needs of your printing environment, you can select a new setting in either of two ways:
•
•
Control Panel
on the printer. See
Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel
.
Remote User Interface
on the host computer. Refer to the
Document Services for Printing Guide
.
1-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH01 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM
S h a r i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Sharing the
Printer
Particular care must be taken when changing settings for a printer being shared by users such as those on a local area network (LAN). When the printer is shared, settings must accommodate the
common
needs of users.
Considerations for a networked environment include the following:
• Downloading fonts and macros by individual users may consume printer memory. The sharing of downloaded fonts must be coordinated. See
Chapter 4: Using Fonts
,
“Downloading Fonts” (page 4-13)
.
• Switching between PCL and PostScript may purge downloaded data. See
Chapter 3: Using the Control
Panel
,
State Saving
(page 3-28) for PCL and
State Saving
(page 3-36) for PostScript.
• Changing settings for
Jam Recovery
,
Page Protection
,
State Saving
, or
Resolution
affect memory utilization. See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
“Printer Settings that
Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
.
• The type of interface. (See page 3-37,
Appendix A
, and
Appendix C
.)
•
Auto Job End
should be page 3-53, page 3-56.)
On
. (See page 3-43, page 3-47,
•
Auto Continue
should be
On
. (See page 3-59.)
LANs generally require a system or network administrator, a person who orchestrates the use of the network. Refer to the installation guide packaged with your network option for more information.
C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n
❖
1-5
AUG-CH01 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM
M e m o r y C o n s i d e r a t i o n s
Memory
Considerations
In today’s printing environments, technologies have advanced greatly but so have their corresponding memory requirements. To make use of specialized graphics features, fonts, and other applications on the market today, you may find it necessary to increase memory size.
From the factory, the 4505 and 4510 are equipped with 2 MB of resident base memory. The 4505ps and 4510ps are equipped with 2 MB of resident base memory plus one 4 MB
SIMM (single in-line memory module) for a total of 6 MB.
Maximum memory capacity is 16 MB.
• When is more memory needed?
— You receive out-of-memory error messages when printing.
See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
“Printer
Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for more information on how certain printer settings may affect memory usage and performance. See also
“Minimum
Memory Requirements” (page 3-69)
.
— You determine that expanded capability for additional fonts, more complex documents, graphics, or higher resolution is needed.
See
Chapter 4: Using Fonts
,
“Downloading Fonts”
(page 4-13)
for more information on how fonts affect memory usage.
• How is more memory added?
— Install a SIMM (single in-line memory module).
SIMMs are small circuit boards with memory chips that can be installed on the printer controller board.
See
Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options
for more information on SIMM installation.
1-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
Chapter 2
Handling Paper
2 r e t p a h C
Overview
...............................................................................
2-3
Paper Input
............................................................................
2-4
Paper Output
........................................................................
2-5
Paper Specifications
.............................................................
2-6
Weight 2-6
Dimensions 2-6
Paper Trays
............................................................................
2-8
Standard Tray 2-9
Multipurpose Tray 2-11
Optional Lower Base 2-13
Loading Paper
.....................................................................
2-14
Loading the Standard or Lower Paper Tray 2-14
Feeding the Multipurpose Paper Tray 2-18
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-1
AUG-CH02 Page 2 Black,Red Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
Loading Letterhead, Pre-printed, Drilled, or Label Paper 2-20
Loading Envelopes 2-21
Selecting a Paper Source
....................................................
2-22
PCL Paper Sources 2-22
Printing a Page 2-23
Source Mapping Settings 2-25
Factory Source Mapping Settings 2-26
Source Mapping Examples 2-27
Example 1 2-27
Example 2 2-28
Example 3 2-29
Example 4 2-30
Example 5 2-31
Example 6 2-32
Example 7 2-33
Example 8 2-34
2-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
O v e r v i e w
Overview
This chapter provides specific information on
paper handling
:
• Paper specifications
• Paper sources and paper trays
• Manual feeding and loading of paper, including letterhead, pre-printed stationery, envelopes, labels, and transparencies
• Paper source mapping
• Printing
Note
In this guide,
paper source
refers to the slot or opening where paper enters the printer.
Paper tray
refers to the container or device that holds the paper.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-3
AUG-CH02 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r I n p u t
Paper
Input
Paper input sources are the slots or openings where paper enters the printer. As shown in Figure 2.1, the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers have as many as
three
paper input sources.
Figure 2.1
Paper input sources
Multipurpose (MP)
Paper Source
Standard Paper Source
Optional Lower Base
Paper Source
(250-sheet or
500-sheet)
2-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r O u t p u t
Paper
Output
As shown in Figure 2.2, printed output is delivered face down to the tray located on top of the printer. Output capacity is 250 sheets of standard weight paper.
Figure 2.2
Output tray
!
Caution
Depending on paper weight, you may find the output tray holds fewer than 250 sheets. Paper jams may occur if output capacity is exceeded.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-5
AUG-CH02 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Paper
Specifications
Factors such as embossing, special edges, and general paper quality affect paper handling.
Weight
Paper
weight
specifications include the following:
• 250-sheet and 500-sheet paper trays support paper weights of
60 gsm (16 lb)
to
105 gsm (28 lb)
.
• MP tray supports paper weights of
60 gsm (16 lb)
to
135 gsm (36 lb)
.
Note
For optimum printer performance, it is recommended that you use paper made for laser printers and transparency film made for Xerox laser printers and copiers.
Dimensions
Figure 2.3 shows paper
dimensions
in millimeters and inches.
Figure 2.3
Paper dimensions
Paper Size
A4
Letter
B5 (ISO)
Executive
A5
Folio
Dimensions
210 x 297 mm
8.27 x 11.69 inches
216 x 279 mm
8.5 x 11 inches
176 x 250 mm
6.93 x 9.84 inches
184 x 267 mm
7.25 x 10.5 inches
148 x 210 mm
5.83 x 8.27 inches
216 x 330 mm
8.5 x 13 inches
2-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Figure 2.3
Paper dimensions
(continued)
Paper Size
Legal
Dimensions
COM-10 Envelope
Monarch Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
216 x 356 mm
8.5 x 14 inches
105 x 241 mm
4.13 x 9.5 inches
98 x 191 mm
3.87 x 7.5 inches
110 x 220 mm
4.33 x 8.66 inches
162 x 229 mm
6.38 x 9.02 inches
Note
The Xerox printer driver supports all paper sizes in
Figure 2.3. However, if you do not install—or your application does not use—the Xerox printer driver, some of these paper sizes may not be available for your use. Refer to the
Document Services for Printing Guide
for more information on the Xerox printer driver.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-7
AUG-CH02 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r T r a y s
Paper
Trays
As shown in Figure 2.4, the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are packaged with one 250-sheet paper tray and one multipurpose (MP) tray. An optional lower base provides an additional tray, as shown in Figure 2.4.
Figure 2.4
Input trays
Multipurpose (MP) Tray
Standard Paper Tray
Optional 250-sheet Lower
Base with Paper Tray or
Optional 500-sheet Lower
Base with Paper Tray
2-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r T r a y s
Standard Tray
The 250-sheet tray packaged with the printer is called a
universal tray
because it is adjustable to a variety of paper sizes, as shown in Figure 2.5.
Figure 2.5
Universal tray
Paper
†
Capacity
‡
(Sheets)
A4 250
Letter (8.5 x 11) 250
Executive 250
A5 250
10 OHP (Overhead Projector) Film
(transparency)
Label paper 10
† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.
‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:
25mm/1 inch.
See
“Loading Paper” (page 2-14)
for further information on the universal tray.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-9
AUG-CH02 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r T r a y s
Two other standard trays are available for the printer, as shown in Figure 2.6.
Figure 2.6
Additional standard trays
Optional Tray
Legal
Envelope
Paper
†
Capacity
‡
(Sheets)
Folio (8.5 x 13) 250
Legal (8.5 x 14)
Letter (8.5 x 11)
250
250
COM-10 30
Monarch 30
DL 30
C5 30
† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.
‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:
25mm/1 inch.
Note
To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in the standard tray, see Figure 2.8 (page 2-20) for paper orientation. See Figure 2.9 (page 2-21) for envelope orientation.
2-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r T r a y s
Multipurpose
Tray
The multipurpose (MP) tray provides for
manually
feeding a single sheet or loading small quantities of paper, envelopes, transparencies, or labels (see Figure 2.7).
Figure 2.7
MP tray
A4
Letter (8.5 x 11)
B5 (ISO)
A5
Executive
Folio
Legal (8.5 x 14)
Monarch
Com-10
C5
DL
Transparencies
Labels
Paper
†
Capacity
‡
(Sheets)
50
50
10
50
50
50
50
5
5
35
5
5
Less than 4 mm
(.15 in)
† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.
‡ Capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper.
The maximum paper stack size for the MP tray is 4 mm (.15 inches)
.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-11
AUG-CH02 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r T r a y s
Typical uses of the MP tray include:
• Printing a document whose first page is to be printed on letterhead and the rest from the standard tray. See
Figure 2.8 (page 2-20)
for the orientation of headed paper in the MP tray.
• Printing documents that require pages of special paper size, color, or other attribute.
Note
To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in the MP tray, see Figure 2.8 (page 2-20) for paper orientation.
See Figure 2.9 (page 2-21) for envelope orientation.
2-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
P a p e r T r a y s
Optional Lower
Base
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers accommodate one of two optional lower bases with a paper tray:
• The
250-sheet
lower base equipped with a universal tray
In the 250-sheet lower base, you can also use either the legal or envelope tray shown in
Figure 2.6 (page 2-10)
.
• The
500-sheet
lower base equipped with either an A4 or
Letter (8.5 x 11) tray
There is also an additional Letter tray or A4 tray available for the 500-sheet lower base.
To order a lower base or tray option, see
Appendix D: Ordering Information
.
Note
250-sheet or 30-envelope trays may be used for either the standard tray or the 250-sheet lower base.
500-sheet trays may be used in the 500-sheet lower base only.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-13
AUG-CH02 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Loading Paper
Loading the
Standard or
Lower Paper Tray
To load paper into the standard or lower paper tray, follow the steps below.
1
When loading the standard tray, remove the multipurpose tray, if it is installed.
2-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
2
Remove the tray from the printer.
Place the tray on a flat surface.
3
If necessary, adjust the end guide to the desired paper size and the side guide to its widest position.
!
Caution
Make sure that the end guide is positioned in the appropriate detent for the paper size installed in the tray. If the guide is not positioned in the detent, the printer may not correctly recognize the installed paper size.
See page 2-9 and page 2-13 for more information on the standard and lower paper trays.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-15
AUG-CH02 Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
4
Load paper in the tray, making sure the paper is tucked under the metal corners.
Note
For best performance, load paper with curl side up.
If you are loading letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper, see
Figure 2.8
(page 2-20)
. If loading envelopes, see
Figure 2.9 (page 2-21)
.
5
If necessary, adjust the side guide to the correct paper width.
2-16
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
6
Insert the paper tray in the printer.
Reinstall the multipurpose tray if it was removed at Step 1.
!
Caution
With a lower base installed, do not remove the standard tray while the printer is feeding from the lower tray.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-17
AUG-CH02 Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Feeding the
Multipurpose
Paper Tray
To feed paper into the multipurpose (MP) tray, follow the steps below.
It is assumed the MP tray has already been installed. If not, install it by referring to the
Setting Up Guide
packaged with the printer.
1
Adjust the side guides to the desired paper size.
See
“Multipurpose
Tray” (page 2-11)
.
2-18
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
2
Feed paper or envelopes into the MP tray.
If you are loading letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper, see
Figure 2.8
(page 2-20)
. See
Figure 2.9 (page 2-21)
for envelopes.
!
Caution
Whenever you open the front cover, you must first remove the MP tray. Reinsert it once you have closed the front cover.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-19
AUG-CH02 Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Loading
Letterhead,
Pre-printed,
Drilled, or
Label Paper
Figure 2.8 illustrates the paper orientation needed to print headed, pre-printed, drilled, or label paper.
Of course, you may need to adjust your software application’s printing margins to:
• Prevent overwriting the letterhead or pre-printed images.
• Prevent overwriting the drilled holes.
• Accommodate an individual label size.
Label paper may be loaded in the universal or MP tray only.
Note
Figure 2.8 Loading letterhead, pre-printed, drilled, or label paper
(face down)
(face up)
2-20
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 21 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Loading
Envelopes
Figure 2.9 illustrates the envelope orientation needed to print
COM-10, Monarch, DL, or C5 envelopes in the 30-envelope tray and the MP tray.
Note
Envelopes may
only
be loaded in the standard
30-envelope tray
or the
MP tray
. See Figure 2.6 (page 2-10) for more information on the envelope tray.
Figure 2.9
Loading envelopes
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-21
AUG-CH02 Page 22 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Selecting a
Paper Source
For a print job, your software application sends information, called the Printer Command Language (PCL), to the printer to communicate paper source and page size. How the printer interprets the PCL command for paper source and page size depends on the printer menu settings for
Source Mapping
and
MP Tray Size
. If PCL commands for paper source and page size are not sent to the printer, the printer menu settings for
Paper Size
and
Default Source
are used. See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
for further information on these and all PCL Menu settings (page 3-18).
PostScript functions differently than PCL. Refer to the
PostScript Installation Instructions for more information.
Note
PCL Paper Sources
Paper source
is a term that describes the tray, feeder, or slot from which the printer feeds paper.
PCL, and therefore your printer, recognizes the six paper sources shown in Figure 2.10, which may, or may not, appear in your software application.
Figure 2.10 Six PCL paper sources
PCL Paper Source Alternate Names
Standard
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Upper, Paper Tray, Paper Cassette
Manual, Manual Feed
Envelope Manual Feed
Paper Deck
2-22
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 23 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Printing a Page
When a print job is received by the printer, the sequence to select the paper tray for each page is as follows:
1.
Page size is established.
If page size is not sent by the application, the PCL Menu setting called
Paper Size
is used.
2.
Paper source is established.
If a paper source is sent by the application, it will be one of the six PCL paper sources listed in
Figure 2.10
(page 2-22)
.
If paper source is not sent by the application, the PCL
Menu setting called
Default Source
is used. Some software applications have a paper source called “Auto
Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed.” When used, this results in a PCL paper source being omitted from the print job.
3.
When the printer is ready to print the page, tray sequence is established.
For the paper source chosen in the second step above, a tray or sequence of trays is taken from the PCL Menu
Source Mapping
setting for that source. For settings, see
Figure 2.11 (page 2-25)
.
4.
The printer searches in the tray or in any tray in the tray sequence for the correct page size from the first step above.
In a tray sequence, the trays are searched left to right as they appear in the
Source Mapping
setting. For example, for sequence “Std-Low-MP”, the standard tray is searched first, the lower tray second, and the MP tray third. The MP paper size is taken from the PCL Menu setting called
MP Tray Size
.
5.
If a tray with the correct paper size is found, the page is printed from that tray.
If no tray with the correct paper size is found, the tray sequence and paper size are displayed on the Control
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-23
AUG-CH02 Page 24 Black,Red Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Panel along with a message to load the correct paper size.
Printing halts.
— Put paper of the requested size in a tray in the tray sequence and the page will be printed.
— Or, press
Enter
to print from the first tray in the tray sequence, regardless of paper size. If that tray becomes empty, the next tray with the same paper size will be used. This source and size will be used until the printer receives a new page containing a
PCL paper source, page size, or reset command.
2-24
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 25 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Source Mapping
Settings
For each of the six PCL paper sources listed in
Figure 2.10
(page 2-22)
, a
Source Mapping
setting from Figure 2.11 is used. You may change settings depending on your printing needs. For details, see
“Factory Source Mapping Settings”
(page 2-26)
,
“Source Mapping Examples” (page 2-27)
, and
Source Mapping
(page 3-22).
Figure 2.11 Source Mapping settings
Source Mapping setting
Description
Standard
MP Tray
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
†
Lower
Standard-Lower
Lower-Standard
Lower-MP
Std-Low-MP
Low-Std-MP
MP-Lower
†
MP-Std-Low
†
MP-Low-Std
†
Tray or tray sequence to be used for each of the six PCL paper sources.
Additional settings that appear only when a lower base (page 2-13) is installed.
† Use sequences starting with MP to print the first pages of a print job on special paper stock by placing the required number of special stock sheets in the MP tray
(page 2-11).
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-25
AUG-CH02 Page 26 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Factory Source
Mapping Settings
Figure 2.12 shows the factory
Source Mapping
settings for the six PCL paper sources, and how the settings change when the optional lower base is installed and Reset Menus is implemented. See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
“Reset
Menu” (page 3-65)
.
Figure 2.12 Factory settings for Source Mapping
PCL Paper Source
Without
Lower Base
With Lower Base
Standard
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Standard
MP Tray
MP Tray
Standard
Standard
MP Tray
Standard-Lower
MP Tray
MP Tray
Lower-Standard
Lower-Standard
MP Tray
Note
Only the Xerox printer driver allows access to the entire range of PCL paper source and source mapping settings specifically designed for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers. Refer to the
Document Services for Printing Guide
.
2-26
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 27 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Source Mapping
Examples
Example 1
Review the following
Source Mapping
examples to take full advantage of the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps capabilities.
All examples assume that
Default Source
is set to
Standard
.
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to load as much paper in the printer as possible. You use only one size of paper. You do not do manual feeding.
1.
Load the standard and MP trays with regular paper stock.
2.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “Standard-MP.”
3.
Set
MP Tray Size
to the same size as the regular stock.
4.
In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to the standard tray.
The printer will pull paper from the standard tray until it is empty, then from the MP tray. When the standard tray is reloaded, the printer will pull paper from it again.
Note
The Source Mapping setting determines from where the printer pulls paper.
For the paper sources you intend not to use, always set Source
Mapping to the same setting as that used for your regular paper stock. You will avoid unexpected results if those paper sources are used by mistake.
Note
The examples suggest using specific PCL paper sources but generally you may substitute any source to fit your printing needs.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-27
AUG-CH02 Page 28 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
!
Caution
To avoid a paper jam, do not remove the standard or lower tray while the printer is feeding paper.
Example 2
You have a lower base installed. You want to load as much paper in the printer as possible. You use only one size of paper. You do not do manual feeding.
1.
Load the standard, lower, and MP trays with regular paper stock.
2.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “Low-Std-MP.”
3.
Set
MP Tray Size
to the same size as the regular stock.
4.
In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to the standard tray.
The printer will pull paper from the lower tray until it is empty, then from the standard tray until it is empty, then from the MP tray. When either the lower or standard tray is reloaded, the printer will pull paper from it again.
2-28
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 29 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Example 3
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to print mostly on Letter (8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal
(8.5 x 14). You do not intend to do manual feeding.
1.
Load the standard tray with Letter paper stock.
2.
Load the MP tray with Legal paper stock.
3.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “Standard.”
4.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Manual” to “MP Tray.”
5.
Set
MP Tray Size
to “Legal (8.5x14).”
6.
In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:
— Standard tray for Letter pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for Legal pages.
The printer will pull Letter paper from the standard tray. It will pull Legal paper from the MP tray.
Alternatively, you could set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “Standard-MP” and set your application paper source to the standard tray for both Letter and Legal size pages.
The printer will automatically switch between the trays according to the paper size requested
. The disadvantage is that Control Panel messages may be misleading. Whether alerting you to load Letter or Legal paper, the Control Panel will always display “Standard-MP” as the location to load that paper size. You must know which paper size goes into which tray.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-29
AUG-CH02 Page 30 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Example 4
You have a lower base installed. You also have the optional standard legal tray (page 2-10). You want to print mostly on
Letter (8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal (8.5 x 14). You intend to do manual feeding.
1.
Load the lower tray with Letter paper stock.
2.
Load the standard tray with Legal paper stock.
3.
Empty the MP tray.
4.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “Standard.”
5.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Lower” to “Lower.”
6.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Manual” to “MP Tray.”
7.
Set
Default Source
to “Lower” to take care of print jobs that do not contain a paper source selection.
8.
In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:
— Lower tray for Letter pages.
— Standard tray for Legal pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for pages to be manually fed.
The printer will pull Letter pages from the lower tray. It will pull Legal pages from the standard tray. For each manual page, the printer halts and the Control Panel displays a message requesting the correct size paper to be manually placed in the MP tray. Place one page in the MP tray and it will feed if the requested paper size is the same size as
MP
Tray Size
. If it is not, you must press
Enter
Alternatively, you could set the Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower-Standard” and set your application paper source to the lower tray for both Letter and Legal pages.
The printer will automatically switch between the trays according to the paper size requested
. The only disadvantage is that Control
Panel messages may be misleading. Whether alerting you to load Letter or Legal paper, the Control Panel will always
2-30
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 31 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Example 5
display “Lower-Standard” as the location to load that paper size. You must know which paper size goes into which tray.
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to print mostly on white A4 paper but sometimes on pre-printed A4 paper. You occasionally print on DL envelopes.
1.
Load the standard tray with white A4 paper stock.
2.
Load the MP tray with pre-preprinted A4 paper stock
(face down).
3.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “Standard.”
4.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Manual” and “Manual
Envelope” to “MP Tray.”
5.
Set
MP Tray Size
to “A4 (210x297)”
6.
In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:
— Standard tray for white A4 pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for pre-printed A4 pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for DL envelopes. (You could have also set paper source to Manual Envelope for DL envelopes.)
The printer will pull white A4 paper from the standard tray. It will pull pre-printed A4 pages from the MP tray. For each DL envelope, the printer halts and the Control Panel displays a message requesting a DL envelope to be loaded in the MP tray. Remove the pre-printed paper and place one envelope in the MP tray. Press
Enter
to print.
Additionally, you might set
Source Mapping
for “Lower” and
“Large Capacity” sources to “MP Tray” so that you could select the lower tray or large capacity for pre-printed paper if more convenient.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-31
AUG-CH02 Page 32 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Example 6
You have a lower base (with either a universal tray or an A4 tray) installed, and you have a DL envelope tray—see
Figure 2.6 (page 2-10)
. You want to print mostly on white A4 paper but sometimes on DL envelopes. Occasionally, you print on color or pre-printed A4 paper.
1.
Load the lower tray with white A4 paper stock.
2.
Insert the DL envelope tray, filled with DL envelopes, in the standard paper source.
3.
Load the MP tray with color or pre-printed A4 paper stock
(face down).
4.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “MP Tray.”
5.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Lower” to “Lower.”
6.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Manual” and “Manual
Envelope” to “Standard.”
7.
Set
MP Tray Size
to “A4 (210x297).”
8.
Set
Default Source
to “Lower” to cover print jobs that do not contain a paper source selection.
9.
In either your application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:
— Lower tray for white A4 pages.
— Standard tray for color or pre-printed A4 pages.
— Manual for DL envelopes.
Because of the Source Mapping settings in steps 4-6, above, the printer will pull white A4 paper from the lower tray. It will pull DL envelopes from the standard tray. It will pull color or pre-printed A4 pages from the MP tray.
Make sure there is one sheet of A4 stationery in the MP tray each time you print this document.
2-32
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH02 Page 33 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Example 7
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to use pre-printed stationery for the first page and regular stock for the other pages of your document. Your software application has the capability to ask for the first page of a document from a different source than the remainder of the document.
The
Xerox PCL 5e emulation Windows printer driver also has this capability
. It is assumed your pre-printed stationery is the same size as your regular stock.
1.
Load the standard tray with regular paper stock.
2.
Load the MP tray with pre-printed stationery (face down).
3.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “Standard.”
4.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Lower” to “MP Tray.”
5.
Set
MP Tray Size
to the same size as your pre-printed stationery.
6.
In either your software application or the Xerox PCL 5e emulation Windows printer driver, set paper source for the first page to Lower and set paper source for the remaining pages to Standard.
The printer will pull the first page from the MP tray and all other pages from the standard tray.
Alternatively, you could substitute any paper source, except standard, for “Lower” in the fourth and sixth steps above.
Refer to the
Document Services for Printing Guide
for more information about the printer driver.
Note
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-33
AUG-CH02 Page 34 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM
S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e
Example 8
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to use pre-printed stationery for the first page and regular stock for the other pages of your document. Neither your software application nor your printer driver has the capability to ask for the first page of a document from a different source than the remainder of the document. It is assumed your pre-printed stationery is the same size as your regular stock.
1.
Load the standard tray with regular paper stock.
2.
Put one page of the pre-printed stationery in the MP tray
(face down).
3.
Set
Source Mapping
for “Standard” to “MP-Standard.”
4.
Set
MP Tray Size
to the same size as your pre-printed stationery.
5.
In your application, set paper source to Standard.
The printer will pull the first page from the MP tray and all other pages from the standard tray.
Make sure there is one sheet of pre-printed stationery in the
MP tray each time you print this document.
2-34
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
Chapter 3
Using the Control Panel
3 r e t p a h C
Overview
...............................................................................
3-3
Control Panel Features
.........................................................
3-4
The Display 3-4
The Indicator Lights 3-5
The Keys 3-6
Navigating the Menu System
..............................................
3-8
Menu System Indicators 3-9
Setting a Menu Option 3-10
Main Menu System
.............................................................
3-12
Language
.............................................................................
3-14
Language Options 3-14
PCL Menu
............................................................................
3-15
PCL Menu Hierarchy 3-15
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-1
AUG-CH03 Page 2 Black,Red Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
PCL Menu Options 3-18
PostScript Menu
..................................................................
3-29
PostScript Menu Hierarchy 3-30
PostScript Menu Options 3-32
Interface Menu
...................................................................
3-37
Interface Menu Hierarchy 3-37
Parallel Menu Options 3-41
Serial Menu Options 3-45
LocalTalk Menu Option 3-50
Ethernet Menu Options 3-51
Token Ring Menu Options 3-54
System Menu
......................................................................
3-57
System Menu Hierarchy 3-57
System Menu Options 3-58
Test Menu
............................................................................
3-61
Test Menu Hierarchy 3-61
Test Menu Functions 3-62
Reset Menu
.........................................................................
3-65
Reset Menu Hierarchy 3-65
Reset Menu Functions 3-65
Printer Settings that Affect Memory
.................................
3-67
Minimum Memory Requirements 3-69
3-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
O v e r v i e w
Overview
Shown in Figure 3.1, the Control Panel is both informative and interactive. Not only does it display status and user actions required, the Control Panel also enables you to change printer settings to control how the 4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps printers operate in your environment.
Figure 3.1
Control Panel
This chapter describes the following:
• Control Panel display and keys
• Control Panel menu selections
• Guidelines for configuring the printer to meet your printing needs
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-3
AUG-CH03 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
Control Panel
Features
The three major components of the Control Panel are shown in Figure 3.2:
Figure 3.2
Control Panel components
Three Indicator Lights
Two-line by 16-character Display
Eight Control Keys
The Display
The Control Panel display:
• Presents a
hierarchy of menu options and settings
to configure and control the printer.
See
“Navigating the Menu System” (page 3-8)
for information on the menu system hierarchy.
• Informs you of
printer status conditions
such as when toner is low, where to load paper, and so on.
See
“Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5)
for a complete list of messages.
3-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
The Indicator
Lights
Shown in Figure 3.3, three
indicator
lights—also called LEDs for light-emitting diodes—show the activity status of the printer.
Figure 3.3
Indicator lights
Online Form Feed Ready
O n l i n e _ _ _
R e a d y
Figure 3.4 describes the function of each indicator light.
Figure 3.4
Indicator light functions
Indicator
Online
Form Feed
Ready
Description
The light is on when the printer is warmed up and available for printing.
The light goes off when:
• You press
Online
to take the printer offline.
• There is a failure or operation that makes the printer unavailable.
The light comes on when a
partial page
has been prepared for printing, rather than an entire page.
To eject the partial page, press
See
Figure 3.5 (page 3-6)
Form Feed
for information on the when the printer is offline.
Form Feed
key.
The light comes on when the printer is powered ON and remains lit unless a failure makes the printer unavailable.
The
Ready
light flashes to indicate that the printer is
receiving
data to print.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-5
AUG-CH03 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
The Keys
As described in Figure 3.5, the Control Panel keypad consists of
eight
keys, identified as international symbols and labeled in English.
Figure 3.5
Control Panel keys and their functions
Key Description
Online
Toggles between
online
and
offline
.
When online, the printer is able to receive and print pages.
When offline, page processing and printing halts, but the printer is still able to respond to status requests. You must take the printer
offline
to:
• Access the menu system with
Menu
or
Reset
• Insert or remove a font card.
• Perform tasks such as forcing a form feed for a partially printed page.
The printer goes offline automatically when it has a fault condition such as a paper jam or an open cover. Use conditions.
Online
to put the printer back online after correcting such
The online message indicates a “closed” switch; that is, printing continues:
Online ___
The offline message indicates an “open” switch; that is, printing halts:
Offline _/_
Reset
Form Feed
Menu
Displays the Reset Menu and the first function:
Reset Printer
.
Press
Up
or
Down
repeatedly to step through the other Reset Menu functions one at a time. See
“Reset Menu” (page 3-65)
.
The printer must be offline for
Reset
to function.
Prints a partial page if one exists in the printer.
It does not send a blank sheet of paper through the printer.
The printer must be offline for the
Form Feed
key to function.
Form Feed
only works in PCL mode, not in PostScript mode. See
“PCL Menu
Options” (page 3-18)
for more information.
Displays the Main Menu and the first submenu:
Language
.
In any submenu, press
Menu
to take you to the top of the Main Menu. See
“Main
Menu System” (page 3-12)
for a full description.
The printer must be offline for
Menu
to function.
3-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
Figure 3.5
Control Panel keys and their functions
(continued)
Key
Esc
Description
Enter
Up
Down
In the menu system, exits the current menu level and returns to the previous one.
Press
Esc
at any time in the menu system to take you to the previous level. No changes to values will be saved unless you first press
Enter
Press
Esc
while at Reset Menu or the top level of Main Menu to exit either menu.
In the menu system, accesses, sets, or invokes the displayed submenu, value, or function:
• When a submenu is displayed, press
Enter
• When a printer setting is displayed, press
Enter
default value. to access a submenu.
to set the current value as the
• In PCL, press
Enter
to override a paper mismatch.
• When a printer action is displayed, such as any of the Test Menu (page 3-61) or Reset
Menu (page 3-65) functions, press
Enter
to invoke the action.
Out of the menu system, acts as a Continue key:
• After certain error conditions when
Auto Continue
is
Off
, press
Enter
the printing process. See
Auto Continue
(page 3-59) for more information.
to continue
In the menu system, scrolls backward (up) through submenus or through the current list of values or functions.
For numeric values such as number of
Copies
, press
Up
to increase the number.
Scrolling wraps—if the first item in a list is displayed, press
Up
in the list.
to display the last item
Press
Up
for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the
PCL Menu setting
Pitch
(page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling increment is 1.00.
In the menu system, scrolls forward (down) through the submenus or through the current list of values or actions.
For numeric values such as number of
Copies
, press
Down
Scrolling wraps—if the last item in a list is displayed, press
Down
item in the list.
to decrease the number. to display the first
Press
Down
for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the
PCL Menu setting
Pitch
(page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling increment is 1.00.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-7
AUG-CH03 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
Navigating the
Menu System
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps Control Panel contains
two
menu structures:
•
•
Main Menu
and its submenus:
— Language
— PCL Menu
—
PostScript Menu
(when the PostScript option is installed)
— Interface Menu
— System Menu
— Test Menu
The Main Menu system is accessed by pressing
Menu
Each of the submenus may have other submenus, settings, or functions. See
“Main Menu
System” (page 3-12)
for more information.
Reset Menu
and its functions:
— Reset Printer
— Reset Menus
—
Reset I/f Cards
(available only in firmware release 4.0 and when a network option is installed)
— Reset All
—
Cancel PS Job
(when the PostScript option is installed)
The
Reset Menu
is accessed by pressing
Reset
There are no submenus. See
“Reset Menu” (page 3-65)
.
Take the printer
offline
(page 3-6) to access the
Main Menu
or the
Reset Menu
.
Note
3-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
Menu System
Indicators
As shown in Figure 3.6, three symbols called
indicators
may appear on menu displays.
Figure 3.6
Menu indicator symbols on the Control Panel display
Symbol Description
>
=
*
Indicates another
menu
level below this one.
Main Menu
Language
Indicates that a value or setting follows the
option
on the bottom line.
After a
setting
, indicates it is the current value.
Language
Français
Language
English
Example
>
=
=
*
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-9
AUG-CH03 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
Setting a
Menu Option
To set a
Main Menu
option or to invoke a
Test Menu
or
Reset
Menu
function, follow the steps below:
1
Press Online
You will see:
Offline _/_
Press a key...
to take the printer offline.
2
Press Menu
Reset to access the Main Menu or press to access the Reset Menu.
3
Press Down or Up to scroll through the list of submenus, options, or functions.
4
When you see the submenu, option, or function you want, press Enter
If you selected a submenu or option you did not want, press
Esc
to return to the previous level; then make the selection you want and press accept it.
Enter
to
5
If necessary, repeat Step 3 and Step 4 to go through submenu levels to reach all desired options or functions.
If many possibilities exist, such as 1 through 99 for number of
Copies
, you can scroll quickly by holding down the key.
After pressing
Enter
to accept a setting, you will briefly see on the top line of the display:
* saved *
This indicates the value has been saved as the current setting.
3-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
6
You may either continue to work in the menu system by repeating the steps above, or exit and return to normal operation by pressing Online
Note
If you press
Online
not be saved.
before
Enter
the value will
Other ways to exit a menu option or the menu system completely are as follows:
• In the
Main Menu
, press
Menu
the top of the
Main Menu
.
to return to
• Press
Esc
from
Main Menu
or
Reset Menu
to exit the menu system and display the following message:
Offline _/_
Press a key...
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-11
AUG-CH03 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
M a i n M e n u S y s t e m
Main Menu
System
The
Main Menu
system is hierarchical, based on a cascading system of submenus, each containing other submenus or options designed to configure the printer for your environment. The
Main Menu hierarchy
is depicted in
Figure 3.7 (page 3-13)
.
Note
In this chapter, factory settings are shown
boldfaced
and followed by an asterisk (
*
). See Chapter 1: Introduction
(page 1-4)
for a definition of factory setting.
When you change a factory setting or an existing setting to a new value, the new value becomes the
current
setting.
On the printer, the current setting always appears
first
in the list of values and is followed by an asterisk (*). The other possible values are located by pressing
Up
or
Down
to scroll through the list.
See “Reset Menu” (page 3-65) for information on how to revert to factory settings.
3-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
Figure 3.7
Main Menu hierarchy
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu
†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Français canad.
Italiano
Português (BRA)
See Figure 3.9 (page 3-16).
See Figure 3.11 (page 3-31).
See Figure 3.13 (page 3-38).
See Figure 3.19 (page 3-57).
See Figure 3.21 (page 3-61).
M a i n M e n u S y s t e m
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-13
AUG-CH03 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
L a n g u a g e
Language
Language
Options
Language
includes a list of international languages used to display messages on the Control Panel and used to print text on the Configuration Sheet (page 3-62).
Figure 3.8 shows the
Language
options and their English equivalent. See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change the language option.
The
Language
option is not changed by the
Reset Menus
function (page 3-66).
Note
Figure 3.8
Language options
Options
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Français canad.
Italiano
Português (BRA)
English Equivalent
German
International English
Spanish
French
French Canadian
Italian
Brazilian Portuguese
3-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
PCL Menu
PCL Menu
Hierarchy
PCL Menu
options establish the
default
configuration for the printer. PCL (Printer Control Language) is used by software applications to send information and instructions to the printer.
The
PCL Menu hierarchy
is depicted in
Figure 3.9
(page 3-16)
.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-15
AUG-CH03 Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.9
PCL Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Copies
Font Source
Font Number
Pitch
Point Size
Default Source
1* - 99
Internal*
Upper
†
Lower
†
Soft
†
0* - 999
.44 - 99.99 by .01
(10.00*)
4.00 - 999.75 by .25
(12.00*)
Standard*
Manual (MP)
Lower
‡
Standard
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Source Mapping
Appears only when the default font is scalable.
†
Appears only when font cards are installed or downloaded fonts are available.
‡
Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
3-16
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Standard
MP Tray
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Lower
‡
Standard-Lower
‡
‡
Lower-Standard
Lower-MP
‡
Std-Low-MP
‡
Low-Std-MP
‡
MP-Lower
‡
MP-Std-Low
‡
MP-Low-Std
‡
AUG-CH03 Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.9
PCL Menu hierarchy
(continued)
Paper Size
MP Tray Size
Orientation
Form Length
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)*
(USA)
A4 (210x297)*
(Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Monarch
DL
C5
Portrait*
Landscape
005 - 128
64* (Europe)
60* (USA)
Symbol Set
Page Protection
Note: The default for Jam Recovery is
On for firmware release 4.0. The default is Off (as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Jam Recovery
Resolution
TrueRes
State Saving
Off*
A4 (210x297)
Legal (8.5x14)
Letter (8.5x11)
Off*
On
300x300
600x600*
Off
On*
Off*
On
Desktop
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
ISO-4 UK
ISO-6 ASCII
ISO-11 Swedish
ISO-15 Italian
ISO-17 Spanish
ISO-21 German
ISO-60 Norw. v1
ISO-69 French
Legal
Math-8
Microsoft Publ.
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-8 Tk
PC-850
PC-852
Pi Font
PS Math
PS Text
Roman-8*
Ventura Int’l.
Ventura Math
Ventura US
Win 3.0
Win L1
Win L2
Win L5
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-17
AUG-CH03 Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
PCL Menu
Options
PCL Menu
options and their settings are described in
Figure 3.10 (page 3-19)
. Factory settings are
boldfaced
, followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a Menu Option”
(page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the
Document Services for Printing Guide
to use the RUI to change settings.
Settings for certain
PCL Menu
options may be overridden from many software applications. If your software application specifies a value for any option below, the printer
PCL Menu
setting will be ignored:
• Copies
• Font Source
• Font Number
• Pitch
• Point Size
• Default Source
• Paper Size
• Orientation
• Form Length
• Symbol Set
Note
The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to specify three additional PCL Menu options:
•
•
•
Page Protection
Resolution
TrueRes
3-18
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Copies
Font Source
1*
- 99
Setting
Internal*
Upper
†
Lower
†
Soft
†
Description
Number of times each page is printed.
Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
Location of the default font in PCL.
Internal
refers to the font set residing in the printer’s permanent memory. These fonts are resident in the printer and cannot be altered.
Upper
and
Lower
refer to the two font card slots and appear
only
when a font card is installed in a slot. See
Chapter 1: Introduction
(
page 1-3
) for location of the font card slots.
When a font card contains its own default font, the current
Font Source
is overridden. You must change the
Font Source
manually if you do not want to use the default font on the font card.
Soft
refers to fonts permanently downloaded to printer memory.
Soft
appears
only
if there is a permanently downloaded font.
†
Upper
and
Lower
appear only when a font card is installed.
Soft
appears when there is a downloaded font.
Note
The
Font Source
setting returns to its factory setting (“Internal”) if
Symbol Set
(page 3-25) is changed.
If the
Font Source
setting specifies a location other than “Internal”,
Font
Number
(page 3-20) reverts to 0 automatically.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-19
AUG-CH03 Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Font Number 0*
- 999
Setting Description
Default font in PCL.
Only
Font Number
values valid for the
Font Source
location (page 3-19) are displayed. For example, if you have
internal
fonts only, the maximum
Font Number
is 50.
Font Number
values are printed on the
PCL Font
List
(page 3-63) in the first column. Print a
PCL Font
List
to find the correct number to use with this setting.
Note
The
Font Number
setting returns to its factory setting (0) if the
Symbol Set
(page 3-25) default is changed.
If the
Font Source
setting (page 3-19) specifies a location other than
“Internal”,
Font Number
reverts to 0 automatically.
Pitch
.44 - 99.99 by .01
(
10.00*
)
Number of characters per inch (cpi) for the font represented by
Font Number
(page 3-20).
Appears only when the
Font Number
setting specifies a scalable fixed pitch font, such as Courier.
Up
99.99 cpi. increments pitch at .01 cpi, from .44 to
Down
decrements at .01 cpi.
Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
3-20
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 21 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Point Size
Default Source
Setting
4.00 - 999.75 by .25
(
12.00*
)
Standard*
Manual (MP)
Lower
†
†
Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
Description
Point size (a measurement for type height, 1 point equals 0.351 mm or approximately 1/72 inch) for the font represented by
Font Number
(page 3-20).
Appears only when the
Font Number
setting specifies a scalable proportional spaced font, such as
Times New Roman.
Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
Default paper source in PCL if none is specified by your software application.
The printer uses
Default Source
when there is no paper source specified in the print job. Some software applications have a paper source selection called
“Auto Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed” which usually results in the omission of a paper source selection in a print job.
When the printer uses
Default Source, Source
Mapping
(page 3-22) is used to determine the actual tray or slot from which the printer pulls paper. See
Chapter 2: Handling Paper
,
“Selecting a Paper
Source” (page 2-22)
for more information on the interaction of
Default Source
and
Source Mapping
.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-21
AUG-CH03 Page 22 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option Setting Description
Source Mapping
Options (Paper Sources):
Standard
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Standard
MP Tray
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Lower
†
Standard-Lower
†
Lower-Standard
†
Lower-MP
†
Std-Low-MP
†
Low-Std-MP
†
MP-Lower
†
MP-Std-Low
†
MP-Low-Std
†
†
Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
Source mapping
enables you to control
from your software application
the location from which the printer pulls paper.
Each of the six paper sources that can be requested through your application maps to one of the
Source
Mapping
settings.
Standard
is the factory setting for the Standard,
Lower, and Large Capacity paper sources.
MP Tray
is the factory setting for Manual, Manual Envelope, and
Envelope Feeder. See
Figure 2.12 (page 2-26)
for factory settings with and without a lower base installed.
When a paper source (e.g., Standard) is mapped to a
sequence
of trays (e.g.,
Standard-MP
), the printer may switch between them for two purposes:
1) To increase paper capacity.
When the current tray becomes empty, the printer automatically switches to the next tray in the sequence, provided the paper size is the same.
2) To search for the correct paper size to print a page.
If the paper size specified in your software application does not match what is loaded in the current tray, the printer automatically searches the next tray in the sequence for a paper size that matches.
For more information on taking full advantage of
Source Mapping
and for detailed examples of usage, see
“Selecting a Paper Source” (page 2-22)
.
3-22
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 23 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Paper Size
Setting Description
MP Tray Size
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)*
(USA)
A4 (210x297)*
(Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Monarch
DL
C5
See
Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)
for more paper dimensions.
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)*
(USA)
A4 (210x297)*
(Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Monarch
DL
C5
Paper size used to print a page if no paper size is specified by your software application.
The Xerox printer driver supports all
Paper Size
settings. However, without the Xerox printer driver installed, not all paper sizes may be supported by your software application.
The
Defaults
setting (page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the factory setting for
Paper
Size
is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.
MP Tray Size
through the MP tray. The MP tray does not have a size sensor; therefore, you must explicitly tell the printer what MP tray paper size to expect. The printer compares the paper size communicated in the print job to the
MP Tray Size
printer displays a message informing you what paper size to feed through the MP tray.
The
Defaults
Size
communicates the paper size feeding
setting. If different, the
setting (page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the factory setting for
MP Tray
is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.
Orientation
See
Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)
for more paper dimensions.
Portrait*
Landscape
Page orientation.
Portrait
refers to a vertical page;
Landscape
refers to a horizontal page.
Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-23
AUG-CH03 Page 24 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Form Length
Setting Description
005 - 128
64*
(Europe)
60*
(USA)
Number of lines per page used in PCL.
The
Form Length
setting is automatically adjusted when the
Paper Size
(page 3-23) default is changed.
For example, if you set
Paper Size
to “A4 (210x297)”
Form Length
is adjusted to 64 automatically. If
Paper
Size
is set to “Letter (8.5X11),”
Form Length
is adjusted to 60.
Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
The
Defaults
(page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the
Form Length
factory setting is 64 or 60.
3-24
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 25 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Symbol Set
Setting Description
Desktop
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
ISO-4 UK
ISO-6 ASCII
ISO-11 Swedish
ISO-15 Italian
ISO-17 Spanish
ISO-21 German
ISO-60 Norw. V1
ISO-69 French
Legal
Math-8
Microsoft Publ.
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-8 Tk
PC-850
PC-852
Pi Font
PS Math
PS Text
Roman-8*
Ventura Int’l.
Ventura Math
Ventura US
Win 3.0
Win L1
Win L2
Win L5
Collection of characters available for a font, including uppercase and lowercase alphabets, punctuation marks, and special characters such as open and close quotation marks or international characters.
Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
Note
When you change
Symbol Set
, the settings for
Font Number
(page 3-20) and
Font Source
(page 3-19) are reset to their factory settings automatically.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-25
AUG-CH03 Page 26 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option Setting Description
Page Protection
Jam Recovery
Note: The default for Jam
Recovery is
On
for firmware release 4.0. The default is
Off
(as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
Off*
A4 (210x297)
Legal (8.5x14)
Letter (8.5x11)
See
Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)
for more paper dimensions.
Use to reserve memory for a full page of the selected paper size.
When
Off
, memory is not reserved for an entire page.
It then becomes possible for a page to be too complex to compose. The result is a
Page Too Complex error message and the page may be printed on more than one sheet of paper.
When set to a paper size, each page is composed into reserved memory before the paper starts to move through the printer. The printer may slow down slightly with
Page Protection
; however, you will be assured of printing a complex page on one sheet of paper.
Page Protection
can be overridden by software when the Xerox printer driver is installed.
See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
Off*
On
Determines how the printer recovers from a paper jam. It is set independently for PCL and PostScript.
When
On
, the printer reprints any pages in the printer at the time of the jam, after the jam has been cleared.
The printer does this by using a portion of memory to store data. This setting can reduce printer speed with minimum memory installed. Printer speed can be increased by installing additional memory and/or using the default setting of
Off
.
When
Off
, some pages may be lost after the jam has been cleared. The print job must be resent, specifying those pages that did not print as a result of the paper jam.
See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
3-26
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 27 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Resolution
TrueRes
Off
On*
Setting
300x300
600x600*
Description
Dots per inch (dpi).
Some software applications override this setting. If your software application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
Resolution
can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
Higher resolutions use more printer memory. See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
When
On
, smooths the curves in characters and graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving image quality.
TrueRes
can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-27
AUG-CH03 Page 28 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
State Saving Off*
On
Setting Description
Reserves memory for saving permanently downloaded fonts and macros, when the printer switches from using the PCL printer language to using the PostScript printer language, or when the printer steps down in
Page Protection
or
Resolution
.
When
Off
, all permanently downloaded fonts and macros are cleared from memory when switching
PDLs. They must be downloaded again when the printer switches back to PCL from PostScript.
When
On
, permanently downloaded fonts and macros are stored in printer memory. You eliminate the time to download them again when the printer switches back to PCL.
Note
Temporary fonts and macros are always cleared at the end of every print job.
State Saving
requires 10 MB (MegaBytes) of memory if the PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript option is not installed,
State Saving
may be selected with less than 10 MB. This will prevent loss of downloaded PCL fonts and macros if applications change the setting of
Resolution
or
Page
Protection
. Enabling
State Saving
can have an effect on printing speed with minimum memory installed. It is recommended that this option not be enabled without 10 MB of printer memory.
3-28
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 29 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
PostScript
Menu
PostScript Menu
options establish the default PostScript configuration for the printer. PostScript may be used by software applications to send information and instructions to the printer.
Note
The 4505ps and 4510ps printers are factory-equipped with
PostScript.
PostScript is available as an option for the 4505 and 4510 printers. See Appendix D: Ordering Information.
Note
PostScript Users:
The Xerox Windows PostScript driver allows you to either download the PostScript header with every job, or download it only once. If the printer is used in a network or other shared environment, where both PCL and PostScript jobs are printed, the header will be deleted whenever the printer switches from PostScript to PCL. Banner sheets printed from Novell networks cause the printer to switch between PostScript and
PCL. If Banner Sheets are printed, insure that the printer’s
Language Sensing
option is
On
. To avoid the loss of the
PostScript header, select “Download Each Job” in the
PostScript driver. The “Already Downloaded” option may be selected in the driver if at least 10 MB of memory is installed in the printer and the printer’s
State Saving
option is set to
On
in the printer’s
PostScript menu
. You must download the header at least once for each power on cycle. If several different PostScript applications are used, the “Download
Each Job” option will guarantee that the correct header is always available.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-29
AUG-CH03 Page 30 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
PostScript Menu
Hierarchy
Figure 3.11 (page 3-31)
shows the
PostScript Menu hierarchy
,
which appears only when the PostScript option is installed
.
3-30
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 31 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.11 PostScript Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Copies
Default Tray
1* - 99
Standard*
Lower
†
Manual
Note: The default for
Tray Switching is
Standard-MP or
Low-Std-MP for firmware release 4.0.
The default is Off (as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Tray Switching
Manual Size
Note: The default for
Jam Recovery is On for firmware release 4.0.
The default is Off (as shown at right) for releases > 4.0.
Print Errors
Jam Recovery
Resolution
TrueRes
State Saving
†
Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)*
(USA)
A4 (210x297)*
(Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Monarch
DL
C5
Off*
On
Off*
On
300x300
600x600*
Off
On*
Off*
On
Off*
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Standard-Lower
†
Lower-Standard
†
Lower-MP
†
Std-Low-MP
†
Low-Std-MP
†
MP-Lower
†
MP-Std-Low
†
MP-Low-Std
†
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-31
AUG-CH03 Page 32 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
PostScript Menu
Options
PostScript Menu
options and their settings are described in
Figure 3.12. Factory settings are
boldfaced
, followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the
Document
Services for Printing Guide
to use the RUI to change settings.
Default settings for certain
PostScript Menu
options may be overridden from many software applications. If your software application specifies a value for an option below, the
PostScript Menu setting
will be ignored:
• Copies
• Default Tray
• Manual Size
• Tray Switching
Note
The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to specify additional PostScript Menu options:
•
•
Resolution
TrueRes
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings
Option Setting Description
Copies
Default Tray
1*
- 99
Standard*
Lower
†
Manual
†
Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
Number of times each page is printed.
Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
Paper tray used if none is specified in your software application.
3-32
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 33 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option Setting Description
Tray Switching
Note: The default for Tray
Switching is
Standard-MP
or
Low-Std-MP
for firmware release 4.0. The default is
Off
(as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
Off*
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Standard-Lower
†
Lower-Standard
†
Lower-MP
†
Std-Low-MP
†
Low-Std-MP†
MP-Lower
†
MP-Std-Low
†
MP-Low-Std
†
Sequence of trays the printer uses when printing a page of a PostScript print job.
If the tray requested for the page is included in this sequence, then the whole sequence is used instead of the requested tray. The first tray used is the one in the sequence, going from left to right, that satisfies all page requirements. If the requested tray is not included in this sequence, then the requested tray alone is used. For example, if this setting is
“Lower-Standard” and the standard tray (upper) is requested, then the lower tray will be used first provided that it contains the requested size of paper.
When this sequence is being used and the current tray runs out of paper, then the next tray in the sequence that has the same size paper will be used.
Settings that include the lower tray only appear in the menu when an optional lower base is installed.
Settings that begin with MP allow for printing of the first pages of a job on special stock by placing the required number of sheets of the special stock in the
MP tray.
The factory default is Low-Std-MP when a lower tray is installed, or Standard-MP when a lower tray is not installed.
†
Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
!
Caution
Do not remove either the standard or lower tray when the printer is feeding paper.
PostScript drivers other than the Xerox driver may simply enable or disable
Tray Switching
; they can not specify a setting.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-33
AUG-CH03 Page 34 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Manual Size
Setting Description
Print Errors
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)*
A4 (210x297)*
(USA)
(Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Monarch
DL
C5
Off*
On
Paper size to expect in the manual slot if none is specified in your software application.
Manual Size
communicates the paper size feeding through the MP tray. The MP tray does not have a size sensor; therefore, you must explicitly tell the printer what MP tray paper size to expect. The printer compares the paper size communicated in the print job to the
Manual Size
setting. If different, the printer displays a message informing you what paper size to feed through the MP tray.
The
Defaults
option (page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the factory setting for
Manual
Size
is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11).”
The Xerox Windows PostScript driver allows you to select either “MP Tray” or Manual Feed” to designate the printer’s MP tray as the paper source. If “MP Tray” is selected from the driver, the setting of
Manual Size
on the printer Control Panel must match the paper size requested in the driver. If
Manual Size
and the selection of the paper size in the driver do not match, the page may be formatted incorrectly. You can change the setting of
Manual Size
in the PostScript
Menu after the Control Panel prompts you to load the appropriate paper in the MP tray. The setting of
Manual Size
on the Control Panel only affects paper fed from the MP tray. This setting is ignored for paper fed from the standard or lower trays.
Control of PostScript’s built-in error handler
(debugger).
Should the printer encounter a PostScript error while printing a job, PostScript prints an error sheet when
Print Errors
is
On
. This is useful on a network, as an error sheet will alert the user that the print job had errors and was flushed.
3-34
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 35 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Jam Recovery
Note: The default for Jam
Recovery is
On
for firmware release 4.0. The default is
Off
(as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
Resolution
TrueRes
Off*
On
Off
On*
Setting
300x300
600x600*
Description
Determines how the printer recovers from a paper jam. It is set independently for PCL and PostScript.
When
On
, the printer reprints any pages in the printer at the time of the jam, after the jam has been cleared.
The printer does this by using a portion of memory to store data. This setting can reduce printer speed with minimum memory installed. Printer speed can be increased by installing additional memory and/or using the default setting of
Off
.
When
Off
, some pages may be lost after the jam has been cleared. The print job must be resent, specifying those pages that did not print as a result of the paper jam.
See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
Dots per inch (dpi).
Some software applications override this setting. If your software application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.
Resolution
can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
Higher resolutions require more printer memory. See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
When
On
, smooths the curves in characters and graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving image quality.
TrueRes
can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-35
AUG-CH03 Page 36 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
State Saving Off*
On
Setting Description
Reserves memory for saving the contents of virtual memory, when print jobs switch from PostScript to the PCL printer language or when the printer steps down in
Page Protection
or
Resolution
.
When
Off
, if print jobs switch from PostScript to PCL, the contents of virtual memory are cleared.
†
When
On
,
State Saving
saves virtual memory contents, eliminating the time to download again when switching back to PostScript.
State Saving
requires 10 MB (MegaBytes) of memory if the PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript option is not installed,
State Saving
may be selected with less than 10 MB. This will prevent loss of downloaded PCL fonts and macros if applications change the setting of
Resolution
or
Page
Protection
. Enabling
State Saving
can have an effect on printing speed with minimum memory installed. It is recommended that this option not be enabled without 10 MB of printer memory.
Note
The contents of virtual memory will not be saved if there is not enough free memory.
†
In Microsoft Windows, the PostScript printer driver has an option for determining whether header information
(general instructions PostScript needs before processing a print job) is sent with every print job or just once at the start of a PostScript session. The header is stored in virtual memory. If you set the header option to send it to the printer once, turning
State Saving
operation.
On
means the header will not need to be sent again upon return to PostScript
3-36
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 37 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Interface
Menu
Interface Menu
Hierarchy
The
Interface Menu
contains submenus for the
parallel
and
serial
ports on the printer as well as submenus for
network interface
ports
when a network option(s) is installed
.
The
Interface Menu
may include submenus for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Parallel Menu
(See page 3-41.)
Serial Menu
(See page 3-45.)
LocalTalk Menu
(See page 3-50.)
Ethernet Menu
(See page 3-51.)
Token Ring Menu
(See page 3-54.)
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)
shows the
Interface Menu hierarchy
.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-37
AUG-CH03 Page 38 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu
†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Parallel Menu
Port Enable
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Bidirectional
Transfer Rate
Off
On*
Off*
On
High
Low*
Off
On*
5 - 999 secs (30*)
PCL*
PostScript
†
Off
On*
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
3-38
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 39 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
(continued)
Port Enable Off
On*
Serial Menu
Port Timeout 5 - 999 secs (30*)
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Port Type
Baud Rate
PCL*
PostScript
†
Off
On*
Off
On*
RS232*
RS422
57600
38400
19200
9600*
4800
2400
1200
600
300
Handshake
DTR Polarity
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
Robust XON*
XON
Hardware
High*
Low
7
8*
None*
Even
Odd
2
1.5
1*
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-39
AUG-CH03 Page 40 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
(continued)
Note: The Frame Type option (as shown at right) is available for firmware release 4.0
only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
LocalTalk Menu
‡
Ethernet Menu
‡
Port Timeout
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Frame Type
Token Ring Menu
‡
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
5 - 999 secs (30*)
5 - 999 secs (30*)
PCL*
PostScript
†
Off
On*
Off
On*
802.3*
Ethernet II
5 - 999 secs (30*)
PCL*
PostScript
†
Off
On*
Off
On*
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
‡ Appears only when the option is installed.
3-40
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 41 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Parallel Menu
Options
The
Parallel Menu
, a submenu of the
Interface Menu
,
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)
, contains options for configuring the printer’s bidirectional parallel port.
Figure 3.14 describes each
Parallel Menu
option. Factory settings are
boldfaced
and followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the
Document Services for
Printing Guide
to use the RUI to change settings.
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Port Enable
Port Timeout
System Language
Off
On*
Setting
5-999 secs (
30*
)
PCL*
PostScript
†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is installed.
Description
Activation of the parallel port.
When
On
, the parallel port is enabled so that the printer can receive print jobs through it.
The parallel port becomes part of a port polling sequence that includes all enabled ports. See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling
for information.
When
Off
, the port is disabled so no communication occurs through this port with the host. If you are not using the parallel port, you can set
Port Enable
Off
.
Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.
Port Timeout
works in conjunction with
Auto Job
End
(page 3-43).
See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling
for more information.
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the parallel port.
When
Lang. Sensing
(page 3-42) is
On
,
System
Language
is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-41
AUG-CH03 Page 42 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Lang. Sensing
Off
On*
Setting Description
Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
When
On
, if the parallel port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the
System
Language
setting if it fails to sense the language.
When
On
, if
State Saving
(page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or
State Saving
(page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also
On
, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
3-42
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 43 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Auto Job End
Off
On*
Setting Description
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
When
On
, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the
Port Timeout
(page 3-41) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.
Use
Auto Job End
On
when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When
Off
, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See
Form Feed
information on ejecting partial pages.
(page 3-6) for
Note
Auto Job End
should be
On
if the printer is on a network.
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set
Auto Job End
Off
or increase the
Port Timeout
interval. It could be the
Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67)
for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-43
AUG-CH03 Page 44 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Bidirectional Off*
On
Setting Description
Activation of two-way communications between the printer and your computer.
Bidirectional
On
enables the printer to send messages to your computer.
!
Caution
Only set Bidirectional
On
if you have a software application that supports it.
Transfer Rate
High
Low*
Relative speed of the port.
The
High
setting will free up the host more quickly for other processing. If your computer cannot handle the high speed, data may be lost.
3-44
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 45 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Serial Menu
Options
The
Serial Menu
, a submenu of the
Interface Menu,
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)
, contains options for configuring the printer’s serial port.
Figure 3.15 describes each
Serial Menu
option. Factory settings are
boldfaced
and followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the
Document Services for
Printing Guide
to use the RUI to change settings.
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Port Enable
Port Timeout
System Language
Off
On*
Setting
5-999 secs (
30*
)
PCL*
PostScript
†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is installed.
Description
Activation of the serial port.
When
On
, the serial port is enabled so that the printer can receive print jobs through it.
The serial port becomes part of a port polling sequence that includes all enabled ports. See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling
for information.
When
Off
, the port is disabled so no communication occurs through this port with the host. If you are not using the serial port, you can set
Port Enable
Off
.
Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.
Port Timeout
works in conjunction with
Auto Job
End
(page 3-47).
See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling
for more information.
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the serial port.
When
Lang. Sensing
(page 3-46) is
On
,
System
Language
is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-45
AUG-CH03 Page 46 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Lang. Sensing
Off
On*
Setting Description
Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
When
On
, if the serial port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the
System
Language
setting if it fails to sense the language.
When
On
, if
State Saving
(page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or
State Saving
(page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also
On
, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
3-46
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 47 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Auto Job End
Off
On*
Setting Description
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
When
On
, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the
Port Timeout
(page 3-45) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.
Use
Auto Job End
On
when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When
Off
, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See
Form Feed
information on ejecting partial pages.
(page 3-6) for
Port Type RS232*
RS422
Note
Auto Job End
should be
On
if the printer is on a network.
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set
Auto Job End
Off
or increase the
Port Timeout
interval. It could be the
Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67)
for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.
Serial interface standard.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-47
AUG-CH03 Page 48 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Baud Rate
Setting Description
57600
38400
19200
9600*
4800
2400
1200
600
300
Speed at which data is transferred.
Baud rate
translates approximately to
bits per second
.
Note
The serial port
Baud Rate
setting must match the host computer baud rate setting.
Your software application may set the baud rate. If not, use the DOS MODE command to modify the baud rate on the host computer. Refer to your DOS documentation for more information.
Handshake
DTR Polarity
Robust XON*
XON
Hardware
High*
Low
Data flow control. (Flow control, also known as handshaking, is the cooperation between the host computer and printer for data transfer. XON signals the host computer to send more data. XOFF is the converse signal that tells the host computer to stop and wait.)
Robust XON
sends the XON signal continuously.
Robust XON
helps ensure that handshaking works with a host computer that fails to receive the XON signal.
XON
sends the signal only once.
Hardware
is used when the host computer cannot operate in XON/XOFF handshaking mode.
Hardware
requires a cable with the DTR (Data Terminal
Ready) pin connection enabled
.
Serial port’s DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal sent from the printer to notify the host computer that it is ready to receive data.
High
is standard for most computers; it uses true logic
(+5 V).
Low
is typically used on nonstandard equipment; it uses inverted logic (0 V).
3-48
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 49 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Data Bits
7
8*
Setting Description
Number of data bits in a character.
The
Data Bits
setting must match the host computer data bits setting.
Note
Parity None*
Even
Odd
Stop Bits
2
1.5
1*
How the parity bit is used in error checking.
The parity bit may be checked against the received character by means of an
Even
or
Odd
error checking mechanism.
Note
The
Parity
setting must match the host computer parity setting.
Number of stop bits in each character. (Stop bits signal the end of a character.)
Note
The
Stop Bits
setting must match the host computer stop bits setting.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-49
AUG-CH03 Page 50 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
LocalTalk Menu
Option
The
LocalTalk Menu
, a submenu of the
Interface Menu,
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)
, contains a single option for configuring the printer’s LocalTalk port,
when the LocalTalk option has been installed
.
The LocalTalk option supports AppleTalk protocols. For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to
Networking: LocalTalk
packaged with the LocalTalk option.
Figure 3.16 describes the option. The factory setting is
boldfaced
and followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a
Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change the setting.
Figure 3.16 LocalTalk Menu option showing factory setting
Option
Port Timeout
Setting
5-999 secs (
30*
)
Description
Time interval for determining when to poll the next port in the polling sequence, after the LocalTalk port has been inactive for this amount of time.
3-50
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 51 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Ethernet Menu
Options
The
Ethernet Menu
, a submenu of the
Interface Menu,
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)
, contains options for configuring the printer’s Ethernet port,
when the Ethernet option has been installed
.
The Ethernet option supports the following protocols:
• Novell NetWare, Version 3.11
• TCP/IP
• EtherTalk
• DEC LAT
• Microsoft LAN Manager
For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to
Networking: Ethernet
packaged with the Ethernet option kit.
Figure 3.17 describes each
Ethernet Menu
option. Factory settings are
boldfaced
and followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the
Document Services for
Printing Guide
to use the RUI to change settings.
Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings
Option Setting Description
Port Timeout
System Language
5-999 secs (
30*
)
PCL*
PostScript
†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is installed.
Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.
Port Timeout
works in conjunction with
Auto Job
End
(page 3-53).
See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling
for more information on how port polling works.
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the Ethernet port.
When
Lang. Sensing
(page 3-52) is
On
,
System
Language
is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-51
AUG-CH03 Page 52 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Lang. Sensing
Off
On*
Setting Description
Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
When
On
, if the Ethernet port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the
System
Language
setting if it fails to sense the language.
When
On
, if
State Saving
(page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or
State Saving
(page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also
On
, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
3-52
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 53 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Auto Job End
Off
On*
Setting Description
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
When
On
, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the
Port Timeout
(page 3-51) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.
Use
Auto Job End
On
when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When
Off
, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See
Form Feed
information on ejecting partial pages.
(page 3-6) for
Frame Type
Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
802.3*
Ethernet II
Note
Auto Job End
should be
On
if the printer is on a network.
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set
Auto Job End
Off
or increase the
Port Timeout
interval. It could be the
Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67)
for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.
Protocol standard frame type.
Refer to your network software documentation for the correct frame type.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-53
AUG-CH03 Page 54 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Token Ring
Menu Options
The
Token Ring Menu
, a submenu of the
Interface Menu,
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)
, contains options for configuring the printer’s Token Ring port,
when the Token Ring option has been installed
.
The Token Ring option supports the following protocols:
• Novell NetWare, Version 3.11
• Microsoft LAN Manager
For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to
Networking: Token Ring
packaged with the Token Ring option kit.
Figure 3.18 (page 3-55)
describes each
Token Ring Menu
option. Factory settings are
boldfaced
and followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change a setting.
3-54
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 55 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.18 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings
Option Setting Description
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
5-999 secs (
30*
)
PCL*
PostScript
†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is installed.
Off
On*
Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.
Port Timeout
works in conjunction with
Auto Job
End
(page 3-56).
See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling
for more information on how port polling works.
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the Token Ring port.
When
Lang. Sensing
(page 3-55) is
On
,
System
Language
is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
When
On
, if the Token Ring port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the
System
Language
setting if it fails to sense the language.
When
On
, if
State Saving
(page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or
State Saving
(page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also
On
, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-55
AUG-CH03 Page 56 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.18 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Auto Job End
Off
On*
Setting Description
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
When
On
, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the
Port Timeout
(page 3-55) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.
Use
Auto Job End
On
when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When
Off
, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See
Form Feed
information on ejecting partial pages.
(page 3-6) for
Note
Auto Job End
should be
On
if the printer is on a network.
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set
Auto Job End
Off
or increase the
Port Timeout
interval. It could be the
Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67)
for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.
3-56
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 57 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
S y s t e m M e n u
System Menu
The
System Menu
options set general printer features.
System Menu
Hierarchy
Figure 3.19 highlights the
System Menu hierarchy
.
Figure 3.19 System Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu
†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Hex Dump
Chime
Note: The System
Messages and Print
Density options (as shown at right) are available for firmware release 4.0 only.
The Power Saver option (as shown at right) is available for firmware releases > 4.0.
To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
System Messages
Auto Continue
Print Density
Defaults
Power Saver
Off*
On
Off
Once*
Continuous
Off
On*
Off*
On
0 - 4 (2*)
Europe
USA
15 min.* (4505)
30 min.* (4510)
60 min.
90 min.
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-57
AUG-CH03 Page 58 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
S y s t e m M e n u
System Menu
Options
In Figure 3.20,
System Menu
options and their settings are described. Factory settings are
boldfaced
, followed by an asterisk (
*
). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the
Document
Services for Printing Guide
to use the RUI to change settings.
Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Hex Dump Off*
On
Setting Description
Print output as hexadecimal codes instead of normal print data.
When
Off
, data is printed normally.
When
On
,
Hex Dump
is used for error checking and error analysis.
Chime
Off
Once*
Continuous
System Messages
Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
Off
On*
Note
When
Hex Dump
is
On
, the Control Panel menus are not available.
Audible chime signal for attention.
When
Once
, the printer sounds one audible chime when needing attention.
When
Continuous
, the printer sounds frequent audible chimes when needing attention.
When
Off
, no chime sound is produced.
Display of system error messages.
When
On
, system error messages are displayed.
When
Off
, no system messages are displayed.
3-58
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 59 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
S y s t e m M e n u
Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Auto Continue
Print Density
Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
Off*
On
Setting
0 - 4 (
2*
)
Description
Control of the resumption of printing after system errors occur.
Certain errors may occur that halt printer operations.
Two examples are:
Out of Memory
and
Page Too Complex
.
When
Auto Continue
is
Off
, the printer does not automatically resume.
Enter
must
be pressed before normal printer operations can continue.
When
Auto Continue
is
On
, the printer automatically resumes operation after certain system errors if
Enter
is not pressed within ten seconds
. The
On
setting is useful in a networked environment
.
Darkness of the print.
0 is the lightest and 4 is the darkest.
A darker print density uses more toner and may reduce the life of the EP cartridge.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-59
AUG-CH03 Page 60 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
S y s t e m M e n u
Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings
(continued)
Option
Defaults
Europe
USA
Setting Description
Control of default paper size settings in various menus.
There is no standard factory-set default for this option; the default varies by world region.
When
Europe
, all paper size-related options are set to
A4 (210x297) and
Form Length
is set to 64.
When
USA
, all paper size-related options are set to
Letter (8.5x11) and
Form Length
is set to 60.
The
Config. Sheet
(page 3-62) is printed at
Defaults
size, regardless of actual paper size.
Note
Perform a
Reset Menus
(page 3-66) after changing
Defaults
.
Power Saver
Note: This option is available for firmware releases > 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
15 min.*
(4505)
30 min.*
(4510)
60 min.
90 min.
The Xerox 4505/4510 printers conform to EPA Energy
Star guidelines. The printer will enter a low power state after 15 minutes of inactivity on the 4505 and after 30 minutes of inactivity on the 4510. This timeout is adjustable to 15, 30, 60 or 90 minutes via this option.
When in the low power state, the printer displays
Power Saver Mode on the Control Panel. When a print job is received while in the power saver mode, the printer may require up to 30 seconds of warm up time before the first sheet is fed from the input tray.
3-60
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 61 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
T e s t M e n u
Test Menu
Test Menu
options are functions that provide output to help you maintain high quality printing.
Options in the
Test Menu
are
functions
to be performed by the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.
Note
Test Menu
Hierarchy
Figure 3.21 shows the
Test Menu
hierarchy.
Note: The Demo Page option (as shown at right) is available for firmware releases > 4.0
only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Figure 3.21 Test Menu hierarchy
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu
†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Config. Sheet
Demo Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List
†
Test Print
Memory Check
Fuser Cleaning
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-61
AUG-CH03 Page 62 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
T e s t M e n u
Test Menu
Functions
Figure 3.22 describes each
Test Menu
function. See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps in performing a
Test
Menu
function.
Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions
Function
Config. Sheet
Demo Page
Note: This option is available for firmware releases > 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
Description
Configuration Sheet to show the printer’s current information and menu settings.
The Configuration Sheet contains a variety of information such as:
• Number of sheets printed to date.
• Total printer memory (RAM) available.
• Firmware versions for the printer controller.
• Firmware versions for Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring, when installed.
• PostScript revision level, when installed.
• Current menu settings.
• Information on installed options, including the lower base.
The Configuration Sheet is printed from the
Default Source
(page 3-21) at the current
Resolution
setting (page 3-27), both specified in the PCL Menu, using A4
(210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for
Defaults
(page 3-60) is
Europe
, or using Letter (8.5x11) paper if
Defaults
is
USA
.
Config. Sheet
will cause a printer reset.
Demo Page listing Connectivity, Paper Handling, Print Quality and Page Description
Languages of the printer.
The Demo Page is printed from the
Default Source
(page 3-21), specified in the
PCL Menu, at 600 dpi using A4 (210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for
Defaults
(page 3-60) is
Europe
, or using Letter (8.5x11) paper if
Defaults
is
USA
.
Demo Page
will cause a printer reset.
3-62
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 63 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
T e s t M e n u
Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions
(continued)
Function
PCL Font List
Description
Complete list of all PCL fonts currently available in the printer.
PCL fonts include those that are internal, on font card(s), and permanently downloaded soft fonts. See
Font Source
(page 3-19) for font storage locations.
The
PCL Font List
prints font number, typeface name, whether the font is fixed pitch or proportionally spaced, point size or scalable indication, orientation, other font characteristics, and a font sample.
Printing a
PCL Font List
will cause a printer reset, ejecting any partial pages and clearing any incomplete jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.
Note
The
Font Number
(page 3-20) may change based on what fonts you have loaded and what
Symbol Set
(page 3-25) you are using.
PS Font List
Test Print
Complete list of the 35 PostScript language typefaces.
With PostScript installed, the
PS Font List
shows all resident PostScript fonts available in the printer, as well as a sample of each. Downloaded PostScript fonts are not shown.
“Test pattern” for analysis of print quality over the entire page; intended for use by service technicians.
The number of
Test Prints
produced is determined by
Copies
(page 3-19) and printed from the
Default Source
(page 3-21), both specified in the
PCL Menu
, using the paper size set in
Paper Size
(page 3-23).
Test Print
will cause a printer reset, clearing any incomplete jobs.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-63
AUG-CH03 Page 64 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
T e s t M e n u
Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions
(continued)
Function
Memory Check
Fuser Cleaning
Description
Complete check of printer memory (resident and any SIMMs installed) and a reporting of the results on the Control Panel display.
Memory Check
is more extensive than the check performed when the printer is powered on. When you invoke
Memory Check
, you will see:
Memory Check
Please Wait....
Before
Memory Check
, any partial pages are ejected and any incomplete print jobs, permanently downloaded fonts, and macros are cleared from memory. After
Memory Check
is finished, it reboots the printer to its power-on state.
If a problem occurs, the Control Panel will display a numeric diagnostic code. See
“Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5)
to locate the diagnostic message associated with the numeric code.
Invokes the fuser cleaning cycle, which is recommended each time the EP cartridge is replaced.
See
“Fuser Cleaning Cycle” (page 6-9)
for complete instructions on performing the fuser cleaning operation. When fuser cleaning is finished, the printer will be reset, clearing any incomplete print jobs.
3-64
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 65 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
R e s e t M e n u
Reset Menu
The
Reset Menu
offers several functions to reset various printer functions.
Options in the
Reset Menu
are
functions
to be performed by the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.
Note
Reset Menu
Hierarchy
Figure 3.23 shows the
Reset Menu hierarchy
.
Note: The Reset I/f Cards option (as shown at right) is available for firmware release 4.0 only.
To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration Sheet.
Figure 3.23 Reset Menu hierarchy
Reset
Reset Printer
Reset Menus
Reset I/f Cards
†
Reset All
Cancel PS Job
‡
†
Appears only when an optional network card is installed.
‡
Appears only when the
PostScript option is installed.
Reset Menu
Functions
Figure 3.24 (page 3-66)
describes each
Reset Menu
function.
See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)
for the steps in performing a
Reset Menu
function.
Note
For all types of reset (except
Reset I/F/Cards
for firmware release 4.0), the printer clears any temporarily downloaded fonts and print macros from memory, as well as ejects any partially printed pages.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-65
AUG-CH03 Page 66 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
R e s e t M e n u
Figure 3.24 Reset Menu options
Option
Reset Printer
Description
Reset of the printer’s PCL and PostScript printer languages to their power-on state.
Reset Printer
is useful when you have printing problems. First, cancel the print job from the host. Second, invoke
Reset Printer
.
Reset Printer
cancels any print jobs being processed and clears all temporary fonts and macros.
Note
Reset Printer
does not change the menu settings of any network option. However, any current print jobs being processed by a network option will be discarded.
Reset Menus
Reset I/f Cards
Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration
Sheet.
Reset All
Reset of menus to their factory settings.
Reset Menus
does not affect the
Language
setting (page 3-14), the System
Menu
Defaults
setting (page 3-60), or the System Menu
Print Density
setting
(page 3-59).
The printer remains offline, so you can work with other menus.
Reset of network interface card(s) to their power-on state.
Reset I/f Cards
appears only if a network card is installed.
Use this type of reset if one or more of the network interfaces is not communicating properly.
Cancel PS Job
All reset functions are performed:
• Reset Printer
• Reset Menus
• Reset I/f Cards
Cancellation of the current PostScript job.
This function appears only if PostScript is installed.
The PostScript job is flushed from memory—the entire print job is discarded.
Cancel PS Job
is useful when a fault in your software application causes a
PostScript error. For example, a PostScript programming error could cause an infinite loop which
Cancel PS Job
would exit.
3-66
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 67 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y
Printer
Settings that
Affect
Memory
Certain
PCL Menu
and
PostScript Menu
options affect the printer’s performance and memory usage, as described in
“PCL Menu” (page 3-15)
and
“PostScript Menu” (page 3-29)
.
Figure 3.25 provides more detailed information on these options.
Figure 3.25 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect printing speed and memory usage
Option Description
Page Protection
PCL Menu
(page 3-26)
When a page is particularly complex with graphics or dense text, the printer may not be able to process it rapidly enough to keep up with normal printing operations. Data may be lost or one page may be split on multiple pages.
Page protection
is a technique that reserves memory to ensure the entire page can be created and printed before the actual printing process. The trade-off in performance is matched by the certainty that an entire complex page may be printed.
Page Protection
is related to
Resolution
(page 3-27 for PCL, page 3-35 for PostScript, and page 3-68) since the amount of memory needed for a page depends on its resolution. The higher the resolution, the more memory needed. See
Figure 3.26 (page 3-69)
for memory requirements.
Your software application may change the
Page Protection
level (e.g., from
Legal
to
Letter
). When that occurs, the printer’s memory is reconfigured. Downloaded fonts and macros may be cleared from memory unless
State Saving
(page 3-28 for PCL, page 3-36 for PostScript, and page 3-68) is set.
If any request for memory cannot be satisfied, you will be notified on the
Control Panel.
If you frequently see the following error message
Page Too Complex you may want to set
Page Protection
to be able to print the entire page.
Otherwise, if you do not see frequent warning messages, set
Page
Protection
Off
.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-67
AUG-CH03 Page 68 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y
Figure 3.25 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect printing speed and memory usage
Option Description
Jam Recovery
PCL Menu
(page 3-26)
PostScript Menu
(page 3-35)
Resolution
PCL Menu
(page 3-27)
PostScript Menu
(page 3-35)
State Saving
PCL Menu
(page 3-28)
PostScript Menu
(page 3-36)
A paper jam may cause a page image being printed to become lost. When
Jam Recovery
is
On
, the printer will automatically reprint the image of the jammed page, after the jam has been cleared.
Because the printer holds a page image in memory longer with
Jam
Recovery
, if a low memory condition occurs there can be a slight performance impact and the printer may require more memory. If sufficient memory exists,
Jam Recovery
has no impact.
The printer prints at 600 or 300 dpi. The factory setting is 600 dpi.
Your software application may be able to set
Resolution
and override the setting here. Whether a new
Resolution
is set by your application or on the Control Panel, the new
Resolution
becomes effective with the next print job or with a printer reset. Unless
State Saving
(page 3-28 for PCL, page 3-36 for PostScript, and page 3-68) is
On
, downloaded fonts and macros may be cleared from memory.
The higher the resolution, the more memory required. See
Figure 3.26
(page 3-69)
for memory requirements.
When
State Saving
is
Off
, fonts and printer macros permanently downloaded from your software application are cleared from memory when:
• The printer switches from one page description language (PDL) to another (such as from PostScript to PCL).
• A memory reconfiguration takes place (such as for a new
Page
Protection
or
Resolution
setting).
When
State Saving
is
On
, the printer reserves memory to retain the downloaded fonts and macros. Thus, the fonts and macros do not have to be downloaded to memory again when switching PDLs or reconfiguring memory.
You may set
State Saving
separately for the PCL and the PostScript environments.
The printer requires 10 MB of memory to enable State Saving when
PostScript is installed. If PostScript is not installed, State Saving may be enabled with 6 MB of memory.
3-68
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH03 Page 69 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y
Minimum Memory
Requirements
The memory requirements shown in Figure 3.26 provide for optimal memory usage and printer performance.
Note
If you encounter memory warning messages, try different combinations of
Resolution
and
Page Protection
before purchasing additional memory.
Figure 3.26 Minimum memory requirements
Setting 300 dpi
PCL with
Page Protection
Off
PCL with
Page Protection
set
PostScript (and PCL)
PostScript and/or PCL with
State Saving
On
2 MB
2 MB
6 MB
10 MB
600 dpi
2 MB
6 MB
6 MB
10 MB
Note
Install a 4 MB or 16 MB SIMM to increase printer memory capacity. See
Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options
for the
SIMM installation procedure.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-69
AUG-CH03 Page 70 Black,Red Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM
3-70
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
Chapter 4
Using Fonts
4 r e t p a h C
Overview
...............................................................................
4-3
Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts 4-3
Where Fonts Reside 4-4
Fonts Resident on the Printer
..............................................
4-5
TrueType Fonts 4-6
Intellifont Fonts 4-7
PCL Bitmap Font 4-8
Adding Fonts
.........................................................................
4-9
PostScript 4-9
Font Cards 4-10
Fonts within Software Applications 4-11
Selecting a Font
..................................................................
4-12
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-1
AUG-CH04 Page 2 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
Downloading Fonts
............................................................
4-13
Temporary and Permanent Fonts 4-13
4-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
O v e r v i e w
Overview
A
font
is a collection of characters of one typeface, one weight, and one posture. An example is Courier New Italic. A font generally contains uppercase and lowercase alphabets, numbers, and special characters such as punctuation marks.
A
font family
is composed of one typeface in all its available weights and postures. Courier New, for example, has medium, italic, bold, and bold italic.
Bitmapped and
Scalable Fonts
Fonts are normally categorized according to the manner in which they are generated:
•
•
Bitmapped
font
A bitmapped font contains digitized images of each character in the font. Each symbol (that is, character, number, or punctuation mark) is a
complete image
in digitized form.
Each symbol is stored as a bitmap (or raster) that represents the black or white parts of the symbol. The bitmaps are copied onto the paper when printing takes place.
Scalable
font
A scalable font contains characters described by mathematical formulae that produce
character outlines
.
A mathematical formula describes a line between two points which constitutes one line of the character’s outline. The images printed on paper are digitized as the page is being printed. During digitization, the image may be scaled, sloped, or rotated.
There exists a variety of mathematical models used to construct scalable fonts, but the two most popular are
Bézier and B-spline.
Scalable fonts are also known as
contour
or
outline
fonts.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-3
AUG-CH04 Page 4 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
O v e r v i e w
At one time, computers used bitmapped fonts only. One set of bitmapped fonts was needed to display characters on a terminal screen, and another set was needed for printing.
These were called
screen fonts
and
printer fonts
, respectively.
Today, software applications use many scalable fonts because they can be used for both screen and printer.
Where Fonts
Reside
Screen fonts
are always stored on the host computer, not the printer.
Printer fonts
may reside in three places:
•
Printer ROM
holds
resident
fonts, installed at the factory on memory chips on the printer controller board. See
“Fonts Resident on the Printer” (page 4-5)
for a complete list.
• A
font card
inserted into the printer holds additional PCL fonts. The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers provide two slots for font cards. See
Chapter 1: Introduction
(page 1-3) for font card location.
•
Software applications
contain additional fonts that may be
downloaded
to printer memory, in some cases, for the entire time the printer is turned on. See
“Downloading
Fonts” (page 4-13)
for more information.
4-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 5 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
Fonts
Resident on the Printer
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped with resident fonts installed at the factory on memory chips on the printer controller board.
Resident fonts are used by software applications that communicate with the printer in
PCL (Printer Command
Language)
. See
Appendix B: Printer Commands (Escape
Sequences)
for more information on all PCL commands.
Note
The 4505ps and 4510ps printers are factory equipped with the
PostScript option that makes available 35 PostScript fonts. To review the PostScript fonts, print a
PS Font List
(page 3-63).
Also, refer to your PostScript reference documentation.
Resident fonts available to PCL include the following:
• 10 TrueType fonts. See
“TrueType Fonts” (page 4-6)
.
• 35 Intellifont fonts. See
“Intellifont Fonts” (page 4-7)
.
• 1 PCL Bitmap font. See
“PCL Bitmap Font” (page 4-8)
.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-5
AUG-CH04 Page 6 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
TrueType
Fonts
TrueType
fonts are used by Microsoft Windows 3.1 or later and may be printed to PostScript and non-PostScript printers.
The
ten
resident TrueType fonts on the 4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps printers are:
Arial
Arial Bold
Arial Bold Italic
Arial Italic
Symbol
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Times New Roman Italic
Wingdings
4-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 7 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
Intellifont
Fonts
Intellifont
is a scalable font format. The printers are fully compatible with this font format and provide these 35 resident Intellifont fonts:
Antique Olive Medium
Antique Olive Italic
Antique Olive Bold
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
CG Omega Medium
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Bold Italic
CG Times Medium
CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic
Clarendon Cond. Bold
Coronet Medium Italic
Courier Medium
Courier Italic
Courier Bold
Courier Bold Italic
Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Letter Gothic Medium
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
Marigold Medium
Univers Medium
Univers Italic
Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic
Univers Cond. Medium
Univers Cond. Italic
Univers Cond. Bold
Univers Cond. Bold Italic
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-7
AUG-CH04 Page 8 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
PCL Bitmap Font
The printers have one resident bitmap font called
Line
Printer
. It comes in only one typeface, weight, and posture.
The Line Printer font may be used to provide:
• Line printer emulation for a print job.
• Backward compatibility for those applications that make use of the line printer font.
To review the PCL fonts in your printer, print a
PCL Font List
(page 3-63)
.
Note
4-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 9 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
A d d i n g F o n t s
Adding Fonts
Utilizing fonts in addition to resident fonts can add new dimensions to your work. Additional fonts are available through the following:
• PostScript option. See
“PostScript” (page 4-9)
.
• Font cards for PCL fonts. See
“Font Cards” (page 4-10)
.
• Software applications. See
“Fonts within Software
Applications” (page 4-11)
.
PostScript
Thirty-five
PostScript
fonts (Adobe Type 1) are available to your printer, either factory-installed on the 4505ps and
4510ps printers, or user-installable on the 4505 and 4510 printers as an option. See
Appendix D: Ordering Information
for more information on the PostScript option.
Many additional PostScript fonts are available through Adobe
Systems, Inc. and may be used when the PostScript option is installed on your printer.
If you have a 4505ps or 4510ps printer, see
“PostScript Menu”
(page 3-29)
for PostScript printer settings.
PostScript fonts are used by the PostScript Level 2 printer language. If you plan to program in the PostScript Level 2 printer language, refer to Adobe Systems, Inc. PostScript language reference documentation.
Note
The
Lang. Sensing
settings in the Parallel (page 3-42), Serial
(page 3-46), Ethernet (page 3-52), and Token Ring (page 3-55)
Menus enable automatic switching between the PostScript and PCL printer languages.
PostScript and PCL fonts are not interchangeable
.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-9
AUG-CH04 Page 10 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
A d d i n g F o n t s
Font Cards
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped with two font card slots. See page 1-3 for the physical location of the slots. See
Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options
for font card installation.
Font cards for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps contain PCL fonts only
. In addition, font cards may contain one or more scalable fonts or bitmapped fonts. However, bitmapped and scalable fonts are not mixed on the same card.
A font card may contain its own
default
font. In this case, its default font becomes the printer’s default font. To change the default font, see
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
Font
Source
(page 3-19).
!
Caution
To avoid problems when inserting or removing a font card, take the printer offline by pressing Online
PCL font cards may be purchased from Xerox / Rank Xerox.
See
Appendix D: Ordering Information
.
4-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 11 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
A d d i n g F o n t s
Fonts within
Software
Applications
Certain software applications offer additional fonts to those supplied with your printer. These fonts are stored on the host and then
downloaded
into printer memory by the software application when printing.
Unless specified as permanently downloaded fonts (see page 4-13), software application fonts are downloaded to printer memory before being used for a specific printer job, and are removed from printer memory after completion of that print job.
Note
Installation of the Xerox printer driver provides the printer with the capability of recognizing which fonts are resident and which are not.
Selecting resident fonts saves memory and time
.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-11
AUG-CH04 Page 12 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
S e l e c t i n g a F o n t
Selecting a Font
How is a font selected for printing?
The general answer is that you select a font
within the application you are running
. For example, if you are using a word processing application, you will select a font
from the font list
within the application.
If desired, you may select a font (PCL fonts only) from the
Control Panel or Remote User Interface (RUI). For an explanation of how to do this, see
Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel
,
Font Number
(page 3-20), or refer to the
Documentation Services for Printing Guide
for the RUI.
A font selected from the Control Panel or RUI becomes the
default
font for the printer unless overridden by the selection of a different font from your software application.
4-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 13 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s
Downloading
Fonts
Whether you do or do not use additional fonts, it is helpful to know a few facts about how the printer uses fonts either resident in the printer or
downloaded
(transferred) from the host.
Each time you specify a font in a document to be printed, the font is downloaded to printer,
unless the font is already
:
• Resident in the printer’s ROM (read-only memory)
—PCL only
.
• Specified in the printer driver as permanently downloaded to the printer’s internal memory
—PCL only
.
• Installed on the PostScript card
—PostScript only
.
• Installed on a font card
—PCL only
.
Consult your software application’s user documentation for a discussion of fonts associated with that application.
Temporary and
Permanent Fonts
Temporary fonts
are PCL fonts downloaded for a particular print job. As soon as the print job is finished, the fonts are cleared from memory.
They must be downloaded for each print job that uses them
. Downloading may have an impact on performance, depending on the number of fonts being downloaded. As a result, the print job using downloaded fonts may take longer than one using resident fonts.
As an example, when you print a mostly-text document in a resident font, printing time is optimal.
If you print that same document using a downloaded font, the time to print the first page is substantially longer than it was for your resident-font document. The remaining pages also take longer to print than those of the resident-font document.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-13
AUG-CH04 Page 14 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s
Note
For optimal performance, use
resident
fonts whenever applicable since they do not require downloading time.
Permanently downloaded fonts
are PCL fonts downloaded in the same way temporary fonts are, but they
remain downloaded
for all print jobs until the printer is powered off.
They are
permanent
only as long as the printer is on.
Similar to resident fonts or those on font cards, permanently downloaded fonts reduce the processing time for a print job that uses them. The distinction is that permanently downloaded fonts occupy printer memory that might be used otherwise.
How do you know if a font is permanently downloaded?
• Specify a font to be permanently downloaded when it is installed or setup within a software application.
• Print a
PCL Font List
(page 3-63) to see all resident fonts, all fonts installed on any font card, and
all permanently downloaded fonts
.
4-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH04 Page 15 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s
Note
In general, it is not recommended that you permanently download fonts. Even if unused, permanent fonts occupy printer memory that cannot be used for other purposes.
In a networked environment, carefully coordinate the use of permanently downloaded fonts. Avoid allowing multiple users to specify permanently downloaded fonts since printer memory may be consumed rapidly and may cause printer faults.
Additional memory (SIMMs) will enable the printer to hold more downloaded fonts. See Chapter 1: Introduction,
“Memory Considerations” (page 1-6) and Chapter 5: Adding
Printer Options for more information about printer memory.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-15
AUG-CH04 Page 16 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM
4-16
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
Chapter 5
Adding Printer Options
5 r e t p a h C
Overview
...............................................................................
5-2
Installing a SIMM
..................................................................
5-4
Installing a Font Card
.........................................................
5-19
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-1
AUG-CH05 Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
O v e r v i e w
Overview
The following printer options are available for the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers:
•
•
4 MB or 16 MB SIMM.
One 4 MB SIMM is factory-installed on the 4505ps and 4510ps printers
.
SIMMs (single in-line memory modules) are small circuit boards with memory chips that can be installed on the printer controller board. Up to two SIMMs can be installed in the printers. The maximum memory capacity of the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps is 16 MB. See
“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)
.
PostScript
.
Factory-installed on the 4505ps and 4510ps printers
.
Adobe Postscript Level 2 is available to your printer, either factory-installed or as an option.
If using a 4505ps or 4510ps printer, refer to the
PostScript
Option Installation Instructions
packaged with the printer. Also, see
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
“PostScript Menu” (page 3-29)
.
•
•
250-sheet lower base
with paper tray
The 250-sheet lower base comes with a universal tray.
See
Chapter 2: Handling Paper
,
“Optional Lower Base”
(page 2-13)
.
500-sheet lower base
with paper tray
The 500-sheet lower base comes with either an A4 or
8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray. See
Chapter 2: Handling Paper
,
“Optional Lower Base” (page 2-13)
.
• Paper trays
A variety of trays may be ordered separately for the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers. See
Chapter 2: Handling Paper
,
“Paper Trays” (page 2-8)
.
5-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 3 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
O v e r v i e w
• Ethernet card
The Xerox Network Interface Card – Ethernet
(XNIC-E’NET) supports the Novell, TCP/IP, EtherTalk,
DecLat, and LAN Manager protocols and is equipped with both BNC and RJ-45 connectors.
See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
“Ethernet Menu
Options” (page 3-51)
.
• LocalTalk card
The Xerox Network Interface Card – LocalTalk
(XNIC-L’TALK) supports the AppleTalk protocols and is equipped with a DIN-8 connector.
See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
“LocalTalk Menu
Option” (page 3-50)
.
• Token Ring card
The Xerox Network Interface Card – Token Ring
(XNIC-T’RING) supports the Novell and LAN Manager protocols and is equipped with both RJ-45 and female
DE-9 connectors.
See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
,
“Token Ring
Menu Options” (page 3-54)
.
• Font card
Font cards are inserted into one or both of the font card slots in the printer. Font cards hold additional PCL fonts.
See
“Installing a Font Card” (page 5-19)
.
You can order any of these printer options from your dealer or
Xerox / Rank Xerox. See
Appendix D: Ordering Information
for complete details.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-3
AUG-CH05 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
Installing a
SIMM
Since SIMMs are available from manufacturers other than
Xerox and might not contain installation instructions for the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers, installation instructions are provided here.
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped with 2 MB of resident base memory. To expand printer memory capacity, install up to two 4 MB or 16 MB SIMMs on the printer controller board. (The total maximum memory capacity is 16 MB.)
Note
4505ps and 4510ps Users:
The 4505ps and 4510ps are each equipped with a pre-installed 4 MB SIMM for a total of 6 MB of memory.
To install a SIMM in the printer follow the steps below:
5-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
Be sure you have a ream of paper on hand before you begin this procedure.
1
Power OFF [0] the printer.
2
Disconnect the power cord and remove all cables.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-5
AUG-CH05 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
3
Remove any installed font cards.
4
Release the rear cover latches.
5-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
5
Remove the rear cover to expose the thumb screws.
6
With your fingers, loosen the thumbscrews.
Thumbscrews are not removable.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-7
AUG-CH05 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
!
Caution
SIMMs and controller boards are sensitive to static electricity.
Before installing a SIMM, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on the printer. If you walk around before finishing the installation, again discharge any static electricity.
Never remove the printer controller board while the printer is plugged in.
7
To remove the controller board, pull the handle with firm, but even force.
5-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
8
Place the controller board on a ream of paper.
This is required to properly support the board during installation of the
SIMM.
9
Locate the SIMM slots on the printer controller board.
If you need to replace a currently installed
SIMM, continue with
Step 10.
If you do not need to replace a SIMM, skip to Step 12 (page 5-11).
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-9
AUG-CH05 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
!
Caution
When removing a SIMM, be careful not to damage the locking clips located at each end of the SIMM slot. They may break if too much pressure is applied.
10
Carefully release the clips of the SIMM you are replacing.
11
Lift the SIMM out of the slot.
5-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
12
Insert the new SIMM into either SIMM slot.
!
Caution
Be careful not to damage the locking clips located at each end of the SIMM slot. They may break if too much pressure is applied.
13
Press the SIMM down until the clips lock it in place.
The SIMM will sit at an angle.
Install additional
SIMMs in the same manner.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-11
AUG-CH05 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
14
Replace the printer controller board.
Align the edge of the board in the guide rails and seat the controller board firmly.
15
Push the controller board firmly into place.
5-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
Inspect this area to verify that there is no gap between the printer controller board and the chassis.
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
16
Ensure that the controller board is touching the rear of the printer chassis.
There must be no space between the controller board and the chassis.
!
Caution
Use only finger pressure to tighten the thumbscrews. Do not use a screwdriver because the threads will be stripped if excessive torque is applied. The screwdriver slot in the thumbscrew is only there to start the disengagement of the controller board after an extended period of time when fingers may not be able to disengage it.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-13
AUG-CH05 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
17
Tighten the thumbscrews using only your fingers.
Do not use tools.
Note
If the thumbscrews do not easily turn, reseat the controller board and try again.
18
Replace the rear cover.
5-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
19
Reinstall any font cards removed in
Step 3.
20
Reconnect cables and the power cord.
At this point, you need to print a Configuration Sheet to verify that you have properly installed the SIMMs.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-15
AUG-CH05 Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
1
Power ON [1] the printer.
If the printer does not turn on:
• Power OFF [0].
• Check all connections and the electrical supply outlet.
• Power ON [1].
If the printer still does not turn on, reseat the controller board.
2
On the Control Panel, you may briefly see some messages. Then you will see the message:
Online ___
Ready
3
Press Online
You will see:
Offline _/_
Press a key...
4
Press Menu
You will see:
Main Menu
Language >
5
Press Down or Up
Main Menu
Test Menu >
until you see:
5-16
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
6
Press Enter
You will see:
Test Menu
Config. Sheet
7
Press Enter again to start printing a
Configuration Sheet.
You will see:
Config. Sheet
Printing...
The Configuration Sheet requires a minute or so to print.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-17
AUG-CH05 Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M
Xerox 4510 Desktop Laser Printer
Configuration Sheet
Total prints = 0
Total system memory = 0 KB
Software version = 00.00.00 - 00.00.00
Installed options: None
Total system memory = nnnn KB
Main Menu
Language
System Menu
Hex Dump
Chime
System Messages
Auto Continue
Print Density
Defaults
PCL Menu
Copies
Font Source
Font Number
Pitch
Point Size
Default Source
Source Mapping
Standard
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Paper Size
MP Tray Size
Orientation
Form Length
Symbol Set
Page Protection
Jam Recovery
Resolution
Resol.Enh.(EET)
State Saving
= English
= Off
= Once
= On
= Off
= 2
= USA
= 1
= Internal
= 0
= 10.00
= 12.00
= Standard
= Standard
= Manual
= Manual
= MP-Standard
= Standard-MP
= Manual
= A4 (210x297)
= A4 (210x297)
= Portrait
= 64
= Roman-8
= A4
= On
= 300x300
= On
= Off
Parallel Menu
Port Enable
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Bidirectional
Transfer Rate
Serial Menu
Port Enable
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Port Type
Baud Rate
Handshake
DTR Polarity
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
= On
= 30 s
= PCL
= On
= On
= On
= Low
= On
= 30 s
= PCL
= On
= On
= RS232
= 9600
= Robust XON
= High
= 8
= None
= 1
The Document Company
8
Verify the SIMM has been correctly installed.
On your Configuration Sheet, the “Total system memory” value should match the amount of memory you just installed plus the RAM resident on the printer.
Note that:
• 4 MB SIMM = 4096 KB
• 16 MB SIMM = 16384 KB
For example, if you installed a 4 MB SIMM on a new
4510:
Resident Memory 2048 KB
+ SIMM 4096 KB
======
Total 6144 KB
If the total system memory value is not correct, reinstall the SIMM.
The printer recognizes up to a total of 16 MB only.
Note
5-18
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH05 Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a F o n t C a r d
Installing a
Font Card
To install a font card in the printer, follow the steps below:
1
Press Online to take the printer offline.
O n l i n e _ _ _
R e a d y
2
Insert a font card into either font card slot.
O f f l i n e _ _ _
P r e s s a k e y . . .
3
Press Online to put the printer online.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-19
AUG-CH05 Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM
I n s t a l l i n g a F o n t C a r d
4
To verify that the printer recognizes the font card as installed, print a PCL Font List (see page 3-63).
Note
When installing PCMCIA font cards, printing a PCL Font List will verify that the cards have been inserted correctly and are recognized by the printer. If the PCL Font List does not show the fonts on the cards, reinsert the font cards or cycle the power on the printer and print another PCL Font List to verify that the fonts on the PCMCIA cards are recognized.
5-20
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH06 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
Chapter 6
Maintaining the Printer
6 r e t p a h C
Overview
...............................................................................
6-2
Replacing the EP Cartridge
..................................................
6-3
Fuser Cleaning Cycle
.............................................................
6-9
Adjusting the Print Density
...............................................
6-12
Cleaning the Printer
...........................................................
6-13
Transporting the Printer
.....................................................
6-14
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-1
AUG-CH06 Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
O v e r v i e w
Overview
Maintaining the printer in good operating condition is essential to having a reliable, well-running machine.
This chapter describes the following:
• EP (electronic printing) cartridge replacement
• Fuser cleaning
• Regular cleaning
• Hints for transporting the printer
6-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH06 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
Replacing the
EP Cartridge
An EP (electronic printing) cartridge will print approximately
4,000 pages of A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) paper, under average operating conditions (5% area coverage). The number of prints per one EP cartridge will decrease if you routinely:
• Print dense text and graphics.
• Set
Print Density
(page 3-59) to a dark setting.
• Exceed five percent area coverage.
Note
An EP cartridge contains both
microfine toner
and
imaging drum
.
The EP cartridge is clean, efficient, and can be recycled.
The printer will alert you to the need to replace the EP cartridge by displaying this message:
Toner Low
To order a new EP cartridge (part number 113R5), contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-3
AUG-CH06 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
To replace the EP cartridge, follow the steps below:
1
Remove the
Multipurpose (MP) tray, if installed.
!
Caution
To avoid damaging the hinge, support the front cover with your hands while opening it. Do not allow the cover to fall open.
2
Press the side latches down to release and open the front cover.
6-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH06 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
!
Caution
Follow these guidelines to make sure the EP cartridge is properly installed:
• Do not expose the EP cartridge to direct sunlight or fluorescent light for more than 15 minutes. Overexposure will permanently damage the photosensitive imaging drum.
• Do not open the drum shutter or touch the imaging drum.
• Complete the EP cartridge installation within 15 minutes of removing it from its package.
3
Remove the old EP cartridge.
Please recycle it.
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-5
AUG-CH06 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
4
Unwrap, then shake the new EP cartridge 6 to 8 times to evenly distribute the toner.
!
Caution
To avoid breaking the tab or tape, pull the tab
out, not up
. If the tab separates from the tape, continue to pull the tape.
5
Place the EP cartridge on a flat surface; pull the tab and tape from the EP cartridge.
You may have to pull firmly.
Dispose of the tab and tape.
6-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH06 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
6
Insert the EP cartridge into the guide channels marked by yellow arrows.
The cartridge fits securely inside the printer.
7
Close the front cover.
Be sure the cover is completely closed and latches locked.
If the front cover does not close, reseat the
EP cartridge.
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-7
AUG-CH06 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
8
If needed, reinstall the
Multipurpose (MP) tray.
9
Perform the Fuser Cleaning Cycle.
See
“Fuser Cleaning Cycle” (page 6-9)
for the fuser cleaning procedure.
6-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH06 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e
Fuser
Cleaning Cycle
To run the fuser cleaning cycle, follow the steps below.
Note
Whenever you replace an EP cartridge, run the fuser cleaning cycle. This will prevent paper jams caused by dirty fuser components.
1
On the Control Panel, press Online
You will see:
Offline _/_
Press a key...
The fuser cleaning process uses
three
sheets of A4 or
8.5 x 11 (Letter) paper. Be sure there is paper loaded in the standard paper source.
2
Press Menu
You will see:
Main Menu
Language >
3
Press Up or Down
Main Menu
Test Menu >
4
Press Enter
You will see:
Test Menu
Config. Sheet
until you see:
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-9
AUG-CH06 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e
5
Press Up or Down
Test Menu
Fuser Cleaning
until you see:
6
Press Enter
You will see:
Fuser Cleaning
Printing...
Three sheets of paper—called the
cleaning sheets
—will be printed with a black band across the page.
7
Wait for the Control Panel to display:
Fuser Cleaning
Waiting...
All three cleaning sheets will have been printed.
8
Place the three cleaning sheets PRINTED SIDE
DOWN, arrow toward the printer, in the standard paper tray.
9
Press Enter
You will see:
Fuser Cleaning
Please Wait...
to begin the fuser cleaning cycle.
No print image will be made while the cleaning sheets are being processed.
10
When the cleaning process is complete, the Control
Panel display automatically returns to:
Main Menu
Test Menu >
6-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH06 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e
11
On the Control Panel, press Online
You will see:
Online ___
Ready
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-11
AUG-CH06 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
A d j u s t i n g t h e P r i n t D e n s i t y
Adjusting the Print
Density
The print density was adjusted at the factory to provide optimum print quality. However, should you desire to darken or lighten the print density, follow the steps below.
1
Select the System Menu (see page 3-57).
2
Select Print Density.
The print choices are from 0 to 4. 0 is the lightest and 4 is the darkest.
If the desired print density cannot be achieved, see
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting
,
“Print Quality Problems”
(page 7-29).
6-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH06 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
C l e a n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Cleaning the Printer
For optimum performance, the printer should not be placed near vents or dust-producing equipment. Particles in the air may enter the printer and cause failures in internal mechanisms
For best results, clean the outside of the printer with a damp cloth. Do not use detergents.
!
Caution
Make sure the printer is powered OFF [0] before you clean it.
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-13
AUG-CH06 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM
T r a n s p o r t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Transporting the Printer
When transporting the printer more than a short distance, follow the guidelines shown in Figure 6.1.
Figure 6.1
Hints for transporting the printer
Helpful Hints for Moving the Printer
Use the original shipping box and materials. If the original box or materials are not available or are unusable, use a sturdy packing box and a generous amount of cushioning or packing material.
1.
Remove and pack the Multipurpose Tray.
2.
Remove the EP cartridge and pack it in sturdy, light-proof material.
A sealed bag is recommended to prevent toner leakage.
3.
Push in the Output Tray support so that it is flush with the edge of the printer.
4.
Disconnect and pack the printer. Remove and pack all printer cables.
If the printer is on a network, refer to your network software guide or consult with the Network Administrator before disconnecting the network cable.
5.
Disconnect and pack the power cord.
6.
Locate and pack all documentation for the printer.
7.
Place the printer, accessories, and documentation in the original box or in a similar box.
8.
Make sure packing materials will inhibit breakage and jarring.
6-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 1 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
7 r e t p a h C
Overview
...............................................................................
7-2
Before Calling for Service 7-2
Locating Your Printer’s Serial Number 7-4
Displayed Control Panel Messages
.....................................
7-5
Paper Jams
..........................................................................
7-19
Clearing Paper Jams from the Standard Tray or Lower
Base 7-21
Clearing Paper Jams from the MP tray 7-25
Printer Operational Problems
............................................
7-26
Print Quality Problems
.......................................................
7-29
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-1
AUG-CH07 Page 2 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
O v e r v i e w
Overview
Before Calling for
Service
This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your 4505/4505ps or 4510/4510ps, and provides some possible solutions to these problems. This chapter will help you troubleshoot problems associated with:
• Displayed control panel messages
• Paper transport
• Printer operation
• Deterioration of print quality
If you encounter a problem, locate the type of problem in this section and perform the suggested corrective actions. If you are unable to resolve the problem, contact your dealer or
Xerox / Rank Xerox for service.
Before calling for service, be sure you have thoroughly reviewed the troubleshooting section provided for your type of problem and have performed the suggested corrective actions.
When calling for service, be prepared to provide the following information:
• The serial number of your printer. See
“Locating Your
Printer’s Serial Number” (page 7-4)
.
• Your name and your company’s name
• A description of the problem, including the severity of the problem:
—
Critical
Printer is down and/or user has no production capability
– inability of a critical application (job) to run
– frequency of failure precludes production use
– critical integrity defect
7-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 3 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
O v e r v i e w
—
Serious
Printer is operational but production capability is seriously degraded
– inability of a major application (job) to run
– failure requires frequent operational intervention to
maintain productivity
– non-critical integrity defect
—
Moderate
Printer is operational, but production capability is reduced
– a non-critical application (job) can not be printed
– continuing, but infrequent failure requiring
operational intervention
– a non-critical product feature or function does not
work
• If any special conditions have occurred:
— New application (job) being run?
— Did application run correctly before?
— Have there been any modifications to the application
(job)?
— Have there been any modifications to the host system?
— Has service been performed recently on the printer?
— Does application (job) print properly on another printer (either Xerox or other type which supports same emulation)?
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-3
AUG-CH07 Page 4 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
O v e r v i e w
Locating Your
Printer’s Serial
Number
Also have available:
• Any error code or message displayed on the Control
Panel
• A copy of the Configuration Sheet
• A copy of the output with the problem
• A copy of the print job as it was input
If possible, be near the printer when you call so you can perform any suggested corrective actions.
Your printer’s serial number is located on the printer frame behind the rear cover. See Figure 7.1.
Figure 7.1
Locating your printer’s serial number
serial number
7-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 5 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Displayed
Control Panel
Messages
Control Panel messages are listed in alphabetical order in
Figure 7.2, preceded by numerical diagnostic error codes.
Not listed are the Control Panel menu options, settings, or functions covered in
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
.
Note
Some two-line messages are separated by the top line and bottom line. In these instances, look up each line of the message separately.
In Figure 7.2, “
ACTION
” indicates what you must do to respond to or clear the message.
You might see a five digit number in the lower right of the
Control Panel. Five-digit codes are for use by manufacturing and service centers only. The user can ignore five-digit codes.
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
Message
0001
†
†
Appears in the top left side of the display.
Indicates which module failed.
0040
†
†
Appears in the top left side of the display.
Indicates which module failed.
0100
†
†
Appears in the top left side of the display.
Indicates which module failed.
Description/Action
The main controller board has failed.
ACTION: Replace controller, or contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
A PostScript checksum error has occurred.
ACTION: The PostScript card has failed and needs to be replaced.
SIMM in slot 0 has failed.
ACTION: Move the SIMM to Slot 1; see
“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)
. If a memory error (0101) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error, the main controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-5
AUG-CH07 Page 6 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
0101
†
†
Appears in the top left side of the display.
Indicates which module failed.
1000
†
†
Appears in the top left side of the display.
Indicates which module failed.
2000
†
†
Appears in the top left side of the display.
Indicates which module failed.
Both Cards Out
Replace Original
Card Err. both
Power Off & On
Close Cover
Comm. Error
Description/Action
SIMM in slot 1 has failed.
ACTION: Move the SIMM to Slot 0; see
“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)
. If a memory error (0100) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error, the main controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Communication has failed between the printer controller and the printer.
ACTION: Verify the controller board is seated properly. If the message still appears, replace the controller, replace the interface between the controller and printer engine, or replace the print engine; or, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
A key on the Control Panel is stuck in the down position.
ACTION: Press any key. If no response, the Control Panel may need to be replaced.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was offline, but the cards were still being used by the software application.
ACTION: To clear the error message and resume printing, reseat or reinstall the cards. Press
Online
On completion of the print job, you can take the printer offline and remove the cards.
Both the upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was online.
ACTION: Power OFF the printer, then power it ON to resume.
The main cover is open.
ACTION: Close it, then press
Online
to resume normal operation.
If your printer is configured for
serial
, a framing or parity error has occurred on the serial interface.
ACTION: You have a mismatch between your printer and the host. Check your printer serial configuration (baud rate, handshake, parity, etc.) to be certain the serial settings match your host (page 3-45). If problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
If your printer is configured for
parallel
, the printer is not able to communicate with the host using bidirectional parallel.
ACTION: Check the parallel cable to make sure it is connected properly on both the printer and the host. Inspect the parallel cable for any defects; if wires are broken or the cable appears to be damaged, replace the cable. Check the host to be certain that it is configured properly. Under the Parallel Menu, turn
Bidirectional
Off
. If problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
7-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 7 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message Description/Action
Config. Sheet
Printing...
Ethernet Fail
Flushing…
Fuser Cleaning
Please Wait...
Fuser Cleaning
Printing...
Fuser Cleaning
Waiting...
Fuser Failure
Service Required
Hex Dump
The Configuration Sheet is printing.
See
Config. Sheet
, page 3-62.
ACTION: None
The Ethernet card (XNIC-E’NET) has failed and cannot be used.
ACTION: Press
Enter
to allow the printer to continue as if the Ethernet card were not installed. This error is not subject to
Auto Continue
(page 3-59). Print a
Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Ethernet as present, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
For PostScript only, the print job could not be printed and is being parsed out and discarded.
ACTION: The message remains until the print job being flushed is complete, which may require further data to be sent from the host.
The
Fuser Cleaning
(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
This message appears when the three cleaning sheets have been printed, placed in the input tray, and are now being fed into the printer.
ACTION: None
The
Fuser Cleaning
(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
The three cleaning sheets are being printed.
ACTION: None
The
Fuser Cleaning
(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
The cleaning sheets have been printed.
ACTION: Place the three cleaning sheets, printed side down and arrow toward printer, in the standard paper tray. Press
Enter
Fuser assembly has failed; printing cannot resume.
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Hex dump mode is
On
.
Used for debugging. See
Hex Dump
(page 3-58).
ACTION: None
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-7
AUG-CH07 Page 8 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message Description/Action
Install
EP Cartridge
IOT NVM Fail
Service Required
Laser Failure
Service Required
Last Page
The EP cartridge is missing or not installed correctly.
ACTION: Reseat existing cartridge or install a new cartridge. See
“Replacing the EP
Cartridge” (page 6-3)
. If problem continues, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) has failed on the print engine (also called the
IOT—Image Output Terminal). Printing cannot resume.
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Laser assembly has failed; printing cannot continue.
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
The printer was busy processing data from a host but the last page was not completed and the last page timeout has expired.
This message appears until either:
• More data arrives.
or
•
Port Time Out
expires and
Auto Job End
is
On
.
or
• PostScript “waittimeout” expires.
ACTION: None.
ACTION: Load A4 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
Load A4
Load A5
Load B5
ACTION: Load A5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
This message is for the manual bypass slot (MP tray) only.
ACTION: Load B5 (ISO) paper into the MP tray.
ACTION: Load C5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
Load C5
Load Com-10
Load DL
Load Exec
Load Folio
ACTION: Load Com-10 envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
ACTION: Load DL envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
ACTION: Load Executive paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
ACTION: Load Folio paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
7-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 9 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message Description/Action
ACTION: Load Legal paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
Load Legal
Load Letter
ACTION: Load Letter paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
Load Monarch
LocalTalk Fail
Lower
Lower Card Err
Power OFF & ON
Lower Card Out
Replace Original
Lower Tray Empty
Lower Tray Out
Low-Std-MP
Lower-MP
ACTION: Load Monarch envelopes into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
The LocalTalk card (XNIC-L’TALK) has failed and cannot be used.
ACTION: Press
Enter
to allow the printer to continue as if the LocalTalk card were not installed. This error is not subject to
Auto Continue
(page 3-59). Print a
Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show LocalTalk as present, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Lower tray needs paper.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to load. Either load that size or press
Enter
Lower font card was removed while the printer was online.
ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal operations.
Lower font card was removed while the printer was offline, but the card was still being used by the software application.
ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer offline and return the card to its slot. Then press
Online
to resume printing. On completion of the print job, you can take the printer offline and remove the card.
The lower tray does not contain paper.
ACTION: Load paper in the lower tray.
The lower tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.
ACTION: Insert lower tray.
Paper needs to be added to the lower, standard, or MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Paper needs to be added to the lower or MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-9
AUG-CH07 Page 10 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
Lower-Standard
MP Tray
MP-Low-Std
MP-Lower
MP-Standard
MP-Std-Low
Memory Check
Please Wait...
Memory Failure
Service Required
NV Memory Fail
Service Required
Description/Action
Paper needs to be added to the lower or standard tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
The printer is requesting paper in the MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to insert. You may use the paper size requested or any size the MP tray will accept. If the paper size requested is not the same as the MP Tray Size, press
Enter
See
“Multipurpose Tray” (page 2-11)
.
Paper needs to be added to the MP, lower, or standard tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Paper needs to be added to the MP or lower tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Paper needs to be added to the MP or standard tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Paper needs to be added to the MP, standard, or lower tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Memory Check
was invoked from the Test Menu. See
“Test Menu” (page 3-61)
.
The printer resets upon completion.
ACTION: None
Printer controller memory has failed; printing cannot resume.
ACTION:
• Perform a
Memory Check
(page 3-64) to see if you can locate the problem.
• Try powering OFF [0] the printer then ON [1] again.
If the problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Nonvolatile memory in the printer engine or controller has failed; printing cannot resume.
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
7-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 11 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
Offline _/_
Online ___
Open Cover
Clear Paper Path
Out of Memory
Description/Action
Printer is offline, not in menu mode, and without any fault conditions.
Offline does not mean the printer is disconnected from the computer. It means page formatting and printing are halted.
ACTION: To put the printer online, press
Online
Printer is online and either processing data or ready to accept print jobs.
ACTION: None
Printer has a paper jam.
ACTION: Open the cover and remove paper from the paper path. See
“Paper
Jams” (page 7-19)
.
Current job cannot print because it exceeds available memory.
See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
.
• For PCL, the bottom line displays,
Press *
Auto Continue
(page 3-59) may be
On
, you will see the message below for ten seconds:
Press *
– The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing
Enter
for you).
• For PostScript, it displays
Flushing...
The page is ejected from the printer. Depending on the cause of the problem, your print job may continue or be ended.
ACTION:
• Reduce resolution to 300 dpi.
• Install additional memory. See
“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)
.
• Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-11
AUG-CH07 Page 12 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
Page Too Complex
PCL Font List
Printing...
Please Read
Last Print
Power Saver
On
Press *
Press a key...
Processing...
Description/Action
In PCL, the printing on a page is broken up into horizontal bands. When
Page
Protection
is
Off
, as a page is processed, each band has a limited time to be composed and imprinted on the page.
Page Too Complex means the current page cannot print because there is not enough time to compose it.
ACTION: Press
Enter
The page will be ejected and the print job will continue. The page that was too complex will be printed on more than one sheet of paper. To achieve printing on one sheet, set
Page Protection
(page 3-26) to the appropriate page size and send the print job again.
Even though
Auto Continue
(page 3-59) may be
On
, you will see the message below for ten seconds:
Press *
The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing
Enter
you).
for
PCL Font List
(page 3-63) is printing.
ACTION: None
The
Fuser Cleaning
(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
Three fuser cleaning sheets have been printed.
ACTION: Read and follow the instructions printed on the fuser cleaning sheets.
Power consumption is reduced by means of the power saver mode.
When no printing has occurred for 10 minutes, the printer will automatically go into Power Saver mode.
ACTION: None (Treat this message the same as the “Online/Ready” message.)
The printer has a PCL error.
ACTION: Press
Enter
This message functions with the System Menu option
Auto Continue
(page 3-59). When
Auto Continue
is
On
, this message is cleared automatically after ten seconds, and normal printing operation resumes.
The printer has just been taken offline.
ACTION: No more processing can take place until you press another key (any key).
Printer is processing data from a computer for printing.
ACTION: None
7-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 13 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message Description/Action
PS Font List
Printing...
Ready
Reset Menus
Please Wait...
Reset Printer
Please Wait...
Self Test...
Standard
Standard-Lower
Standard-MP
Std-Low-MP
List of PostScript fonts (page 3-63) is printing.
ACTION: None
Printer is online and waiting for data to print.
ACTION: None
Reset Menus
has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-65).
Returns all menu settings except the
Language
(page 3-14) setting and the
System Menu
Defaults
(page 3-60) setting to their factory setting and clears any print jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.
ACTION: None
Reset Printer
or
Reset All
has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-65).
The printer clears any print jobs and temporary fonts and macros from memory, then goes online.
ACTION: None
The printer is in power-on diagnostics. This message appears shortly after power-on as soon as the Control Panel is initialized and can display text.
If there is no failure during power-on diagnostics, the next message displayed will indicate the printer is online and ready to receive data.
ACTION: None
Standard tray needs paper.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Paper needs to be added to either the standard or lower tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Paper needs to be added to either the standard or MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
Paper needs to be added to the standard, lower, or MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press
Enter
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-13
AUG-CH07 Page 14 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
Std. Tray Empty
Std. Tray Out
Temp Font/Macro
Test Print
Printing...
Token Ring Fail
Toner Low
Turn Power Off
Then On
Upper Card Err
Power Off & On
Description/Action
The standard tray does not contain paper.
ACTION: Add paper to the standard tray.
The standard tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.
ACTION: Insert the standard tray.
The printer was busy processing PCL data from a host system but the job was not completed since temporary fonts and macros were not deleted. The last page timeout has expired.
This message appears until:
• Another print job is received.
• The
Port Timeout
expires and
Auto Job End
is
On
. See
Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel
,
“Interface Menu” (page 3-37)
.
ACTION: None
A Test Print is being printed (for use by service technicians).
The message clears once the printing is completed.
ACTION: None
The Token Ring card (XNIC-T’RING) has failed and cannot be used.
ACTION: Press
Enter
to allow the printer to continue as if the Token Ring card were not installed. This error is not subject to
Auto Continue
(page 3-59).
Print a Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Token Ring as present, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Toner is getting low in the EP cartridge, but printing will continue without interruption.
ACTION: Replace the EP cartridge as soon as possible.
A fatal error has occurred.
ACTION: Power OFF [0], then ON [1].
Upper font card was removed while the printer was online.
ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal operations.
7-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 15 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message Description/Action
Upper Card Out
Replace Original
Waiting...
Warming up
Please Wait...
Warning 300/A4
Warning 300/A5
Upper font card was removed while the printer was offline, but the card was still being used by the application.
ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer offline and return the card to its slot. Then press
Online
to resume printing. On completion of the print job, you can take the printer offline and remove the card.
The printer was busy processing data from a host but the print job was not completed.
This message appears until:
• Another print job is received.
• The
Port Timeout
expires and
Auto Job End
is
On
. See
Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel
,
“Interface Menu” (page 3-37)
.
• The last page timeout expires.
• The PostScript “waittimeout” expires. Refer to the PostScript reference documentation.
ACTION: None
Fuser has not warmed up yet.
Message disappears when the printer is ready. The message displays at power-on and may display after the cover has been opened for some time or when the printer is exiting power-saver mode.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to A4; appears in PostScript when the page size is A4 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to A5; appears in PostScript when the page size is A5 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-15
AUG-CH07 Page 16 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
Warning 300/B5
Warning 300/C10
Warning 300/C5
Warning 300/DL
Description/Action
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to B5; appears in PostScript when the page size is B5 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Com-10; appears in PostScript when the page size is Com-10 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to C5; appears in PostScript when the page size is C5 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to DL; appears in PostScript when the page size is DL and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
7-16
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 17 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
Warning 300/EXE
Warning 300/FOL
Warning 300/LGL
Warning 300/LTR
Description/Action
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Executive; appears in PostScript when the page size is Executive and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Folio; appears in PostScript when the page size is Folio and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Legal; appears in PostScript when the page size is Legal and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Letter; appears in PostScript when the page size is Letter and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-17
AUG-CH07 Page 18 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2
Control Panel messages
(continued)
Message
Warning 300/MON
Warning 300/OFF
Description/Action
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Monarch; appears in PostScript when the page size is Monarch and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to OFF.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
7-18
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 19 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P a p e r J a m s
Paper Jams
Your printer has been designed to provide reliable, trouble free operation. However, it is not unusual to experience an occasional paper jam. Paper jams occur most often when:
• The paper stock does not meet specification. See
“Paper
Specifications” (page 2-6)
.
• The paper stock is in poor condition.
• The paper stock has been improperly loaded into the paper trays. See
“Loading Paper” (page 2-14)
.
• The printer needs cleaning. See
“Fuser Cleaning Cycle”
(page 6-9)
.
• Printer parts have worn and need to be replaced.
When first powered ON, the printer detects any jammed paper. The movement of paper through the printer is constantly being monitored by the printer’s controllers.
When the printer detects a misfeed or a paper jam, the printing process is halted, and the Control Panel message
Open Cover
Clear Paper Path is displayed. This message indicates that a jam was detected in the printer. The entire paper path should be checked each time a paper jam is cleared.
After the paper jam has been cleared, the printer will resume operation to complete the print job.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-19
AUG-CH07 Page 20 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P a p e r J a m s
The paper path is depicted in Figure 7.3. (The figure includes the optional lower base.)
Figure 7.3
Printer paper path
The following section provides detailed step-by-step procedures for clearing paper jams as well as some tips to help troubleshoot reoccurring jams.
7-20
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 21 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
Clearing Paper
Jams from the
Standard Tray or
Lower Base
P a p e r J a m s
1
If the MP Tray is installed, remove it before opening the
Front Cover.
2
Open the front cover by pressing down on the release latches on both sides of the front cover.
!
Caution
The area inside the printer near the fuser may be hot.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-21
AUG-CH07 Page 22 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P a p e r J a m s
3
Remove any paper visible in the paper transportation area inside the printer by gently pulling it upward.
!
Caution
Paper removed from this area may have unfused toner on it which will soil your hand or clothing if touched.
4
Remove any paper entering the fuser area by gently pulling the paper toward the front of the printer.
Note
If paper is well into the fuser, it can be removed by pulling the jammed sheet toward the rear of the printer. See Step 5.
7-22
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 23 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P a p e r J a m s
5
Remove any paper exiting the fuser area by gently pulling it toward the rear of the printer.
6
Close the Front Cover.
Note
When the Lower Base is in use when a jam occurs, the standard tray may need to be removed to clear a paper jam. Check for paper that may be jammed between the
Lower Base and the standard tray slot.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-23
AUG-CH07 Page 24 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P a p e r J a m s
7
Remove the paper tray(s) in use and remove any paper that may have been misfed out of the paper tray(s).
8
Ensure that the paper is loaded correctly into the tray(s) with the lead edges under the metal corners tabs.
If a universal tray is being used, ensure that the paper guides are adjusted against the paper stock. See
“Loading the Standard or Lower Paper Tray”
(page 2-14)
.
7-24
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 25 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P a p e r J a m s
Clearing Paper
Jams from the
MP tray
1
When the multi-purpose (MP) tray is being used and a jam occurs, remove all the paper in the tray.
2
Remove any paper that has partially fed into the MP slot.
3
4
Remove the MP tray.
Open the front cover and remove any paper that is in the paper transport areas. See “Clearing Paper Jams from the Standard Tray or Lower Base” (page 7-21),
Steps 1 through 5, to assure all paper has been removed from the paper path.
5
6
7
Close the front cover.
Reinstall the MP tray.
Reload paper stock into the MP tray.
Note
Regardless of where the paper is jammed, you must open and close the Front Cover to clear the “Open Cover Clear
Paper Path” Control Panel message.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-25
AUG-CH07 Page 26 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s
Printer
Operational
Problems
Figure 7.4 lists common operational problems and recommended actions.
Figure 7.4
Printer Operational Problems
Problem
Printer will not print
A file sent from the host does not print
Action
1.
Power printer OFF, then ON.
2.
Print a Configuration Sheet (see
page 3-62
).
• If Configuration Sheet prints, printer is OK. Check your software application and your printer connection. See below.
• If Configuration Sheet does not print, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
1.
Check if printer is Online.
2.
Send a plain text file (i.e., one without printing commands embedded in it) to the printer. (You may need to depress the form feed key when the LED remains lit if Auto Job End is not set.)
• If file prints correctly in the default font, with all of the characters in the original file, the printer is seeing the same data that the host is sending, and the interface or communication line is functioning correctly.
• If no data prints (or the last page indicator does not come on):
A. Check configuration to be certain the printer is configured properly.
B.
If using the parallel or serial port, the port may be disabled on the printer. Check the Configuration Sheet for the port you are using to see if Port Enable is ON. If OFF, set to ON and try again.
C. If using an optional Xerox network interface card (XNIC) (i.e.,
Ethernet, LocalTalk, or Token Ring), check the Configuration Sheet to see if the printer is acknowledging that the XNIC is present. (Refer to XNIC installation instructions packaged with the option.)
– If the XNIC is not acknowledged, power OFF printer and unplug. Pull out controller board, remove the XNIC and check that connector pins are not bent. If bent, straighten. Reseat the
XNIC securely, put controller board back in printer, power ON and print Configuration Sheet. If XNIC is still not acknowledged, the XNIC has failed. Contact your dealer or
Xerox / Rank Xerox.
– If the XNIC is acknowledged, check if printer is recognized by the host. (Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter of the respective XNIC installation guide.)
7-26
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 27 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.4
Printer Operational Problems
(continued)
Problem Action
A printed page does not look like it should
D. If garbled data, check Configuration Sheet to confirm that the correct emulation is selected or Language Sensing is ON. Also, check that data transfer matches host configuration (i.e., Transfer Rate,
Baud Rate, Handshake, Data Bits, etc.). If not, correct configuration on printer and try again.
1.
Make certain that the software application you are using to create your print job is configured properly. Refer to your software documentation.
2.
Send a file containing PCL or PostScript commands to the printer.
• If your page prints as it should, your printer and interface are functioning properly.
• If your information prints correctly, but doesn’t look right, you may have:
– An error in your command sequence/operator
– A missing downloaded font
– A mismatched printer option against your host formatting
– A missing or misaligned font card
• Command errors may be identified by looking at your input file or by using the Hex Dump feature on the printer. You can determine which fonts are in the system by printing a PCL or PS Font List. And you can verify your data setup by printing a Configuration Sheet and checking your printer setup.
In a job, a requested font, which is on a font card, does not print
1.
Print a PCL Font List (See
Chapter 3
.)
• If your requested fonts print on the Font List, your print job may need correcting.
• If your requested fonts do not print on the Font List, power the printer
OFF, remove and reinstall the font card. Power the printer back ON, and print another PCL Font List.
• If font card is still not being recognized, try another slot or font card, then print another Font List.
– If a different font slot works, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox to correct the defective slot.
– If a new font card is recognized, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox about replacing the defective card.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-27
AUG-CH07 Page 28 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.4
Printer Operational Problems
(continued)
Problem Action
The text printed is a listing of the PostScript commands instead of the PostScript job
A legal document prints but the edges are cut off
A PostScript job fails to print
1.
Make certain that the software application you are using to create your job is configured properly. Refer to your software documentation.
2.
If Language Sensing is set to OFF, make certain that the
System Language
setting for the port you are using is set to PostScript. See the
“Interface Menu
Hierarchy” (page 3-37)
.
3.
If Language Sensing is set to ON, the job sent to the printer might have included an incorrect header and therefore not have indicated that a
PostScript Job was being sent.
• Set System Language to PostScript in the appropriate Interface Menu (i.e.
Parallel, Serial, etc.) and try sending the job again.
• Check your software to make sure the PostScript header file is being sent to the printer.
1.
Set Page Protection to Legal. If page is still being clipped, more memory needs to be installed.
1.
Check the configuration and be certain the proper emulation is selected; also check the configuration of your printer driver configuration.
2.
If Language Sensing is set to ON, set System Language to PostScript in the appropriate Interface Menu (i.e. Parallel, Serial, etc.) and resend the job.
3.
Set Print Errors to ON and resend job.
• If error page prints, this means that there is a problem in the PostScript coding. Correct the coding problem and resend the job.
• If job does not print and no error page was printed, set Page Protection to OFF.
• If job still does not print, this job may require additional memory.
7-28
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 29 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Print Quality
Problems
Figure 7.5 lists common print quality problems, the likely cause, and recommended actions.
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
Problem Possible Causes
Light/faint prints
Overall image is lighter than normal.
1.
Toner level low/empty
2.
Print Density adjustment set too low
3.
Damp paper stock
4.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
Corrective Actions
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Adjust Print Density (see
Chapter 6
).
3.
Replace paper stock.
4.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Blank Prints
Entire printed page is blank with no visible print.
1.
Defective EP cartridge
2.
No printable data received from computer
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Produce a Test Print (see
Chapter 6
). If the Test Print is normal, check the following:
• Interface cable between computer and printer
• Printer set up and application software
If the Test Print is blank, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-29
AUG-CH07 Page 30 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
(continued)
Problem Possible Causes
Background/black prints
Overall darkness or localized dark bands in the non-image areas.
1.
Defective EP cartridge
2.
Print Density adjustment set too high
3.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
4.
Defective Laser, Controller,
Fuser Assembly
Corrective Actions
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Adjust Print Density (see
Chapter 6
).
3.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
4.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox
Spot deletions
Areas of the print are extremely light or missing.
1.
Damp paper stock
2.
Defective EP cartridge
3.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
1.
Replace paper stock.
2.
Replace EP cartridge.
3.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
7-30
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 31 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
(continued)
Problem Possible Causes
Vertical line deletions
Localized print deletions forming narrow lines running in the direction of paper movement.
1.
Defective EP cartridge
2.
Defective paper stock, creases, folds, etc.
3.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
Corrective Actions
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Replace paper stock.
3.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Horizontal line deletions
Localized print deletions appearing as bands running across the page perpendicular to the direction of paper movement.
1.
Defective EP cartridge
2.
Defective paper stock, creases, folds, etc.
3.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Replace paper stock.
3.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-31
AUG-CH07 Page 32 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
(continued)
Problem Possible Causes
Vertical dark streaks
Black lines running across the print in the direction of paper movement.
1.
Defective EP cartridge
2.
Contaminated paper path
3.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
Corrective Actions
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Clean paper path to remove any toner accumulations.
3.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Horizontal dark streaks
Black lines running across the page perpendicular to the direction of paper movement.
1.
Defective EP cartridge
2.
Contaminated paper path
3.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Clean paper path to remove any toner accumulations.
3.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
7-32
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 33 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
(continued)
Problem
Dark spots/marks
Possible Causes
1.
Defective EP cartridge
2.
Contaminated paper path
3.
Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
Corrective Actions
1.
Replace EP cartridge.
2.
Clean paper path to remove any toner accumulations.
3.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Residual image
Ghost images of previous pages is produced along with the current page.
1.
Defective EP cartridge 1.
Replace EP cartridge.
If problem is not resolved, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-33
AUG-CH07 Page 34 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
(continued)
Problem Possible Causes
Unfused or partially fused image
The printed image is not fully fused to the paper and easily rubs off.
1.
Damp paper stock
2.
Heavy or unusual paper stock
3.
Light image density
4.
Defective Fuser Module
Corrective Actions
1.
Replace paper stock.
2.
Refer to
Chapter 2
for printer throughput capabilities.
3.
Replace EP cartridge.
4.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Skewed prints
Printed image is not parallel to the edge of the paper.
1.
Paper improperly loaded into paper tray
2.
Obstructed paper path
3.
4.
Contaminated paper path
Dirty/worn Paper Feed Rolls
1.
Check trays for proper paper loading
(see
Chapter 2
).
2.
Inspect paper path for obstructions
(torn pieces of paper, etc.).
3.
Inspect/clean paper path to remove residual toner and paper dust.
4.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
7-34
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-CH07 Page 35 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
(continued)
Problem Possible Causes
Image misregistration
The printed image is mispositioned on the page.
1.
Paper improperly loaded into paper tray
2.
Wrong paper size for application
Corrective Actions
1.
Check trays for proper paper loading
(see
Chapter 2
).
2.
Check paper stock and printer configuration.
3.
If problem is not resolved, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Produce a Test Print (see
Chapter 3
)
• Fold and crease the Test Print as shown.
• Both horizontal and vertical folds should fall within plus or minus two lines.
If the pattern registers OK, the problem may be in your software application.
Damaged prints
Prints are wrinkled, creased, or torn.
1.
Poor paper condition
2.
Paper improperly loaded into paper tray
3.
Obstructed paper path
4.
Defective Fuser Module
1.
Inspect/replace paper stock.
2.
Check trays for proper paper loading
(see
Chapter 2
).
3.
Inspect paper path for obstructions
(torn pieces of paper, etc.).
4.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-35
AUG-CH07 Page 36 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5
Print Quality Problems
(continued)
Problem Possible Causes
TrueRes Smoothing problems
TrueRes Smoothing is a technology that smooths the jagged edges of curved or near vertical/horizontal lines.
Produce Test Prints (see
Chapter 3
) with TrueRes switched both ON and
OFF. Inspect the TrueRes target on the Test Print.
If:
1.
TrueRes is not functional (no apparent difference between ON and
OFF setting)
1.
Failed Controller.
2.
TrueRes appears excessively dark:
Corrective Actions
1.
Replace Controller.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
2.
Print Density set to dark/light.
2.
Adjust Print Density (see
Chapter 6
).
or
TrueRes appears insufficient
7-36
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPA Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
Appendix A
Printer and Cable
Specifications
A x i d n e p p A
4505 and 4505ps Printer Specifications
.............................
A-2
4510 and 4510ps Printer Specifications
.............................
A-4
Cable Specifications
.............................................................
A-7
Parallel Interface A-7
RS-232C Serial Interface (CCITT V.24) A-10
Data Rates A-10
Encoding A-10
Protocols A-10
Connections A-10
RS-422A Serial Interface (CCITT V.11 and X.27) A-12
Data Rates A-12
Encoding A-12
Protocols A-12
Connections A-12
Null Modem A-14
Network Interface A-14
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-1
AUG-APPA Page 2 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
4 5 0 5 a n d 4 5 0 5 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
4505 and
4505ps Printer
Specifications
Imaging method
Electro-Photography
Exposure system
Semiconductor laser beam (laser diode) scanning
Image resolution
600 x 600 dpi and 300 x 300 dpi
Warm up time
Less than 60 seconds after power on
Continuous print speed
Processor
5 ppm (pages per minute)
16 MHz AMD 29200 RISC
Maximum Monthly Duty Cycle
Nominal voltage
Up to 10,000 prints
220/240 V
110/115 V
Nominal frequency
Power consumption
50/60 Hz
Less than 450 W during operation; power saver mode operational after
10 minutes of not printing
Noise level
Temperature
Less than 45 dB during operation and warm-up; less than 40 dB in standby
5
°
C / 41
°
F to 35
°
C / 95
°
F during operation
Humidity
15% to 85% during operation
Dimensions
Weight
Maximum memory capacity
35.2 x 39.4 x 25.3 cm
13.9 x 15.5 x 10 inches
12 Kgs / 26.5 lbs
16 MB
A-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPA Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
4 5 0 5 a n d 4 5 0 5 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Factory-provided features
Options
2 MB printer memory
One 250-sheet universal paper tray
Multipurpose (MP) paper tray
EP (electronic printing) cartridge
Power cord (110 volt printers only)
Document Services for Printing
software diskettes
User documentation
On the 4505ps printer:
Additional
4 MB SIMM
(for a total of 6 MB)
PostScript option
4 MB SIMM
16 MB SIMM
250-sheet Base with universal tray
500-sheet Base with A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray
Paper trays (in a variety of sizes)
PostScript kit
Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)
LocalTalk network interface card (XNIC-L’TALK)
Token Ring network interface card (XNIC-T’RING)
PCL font cards
See
Appendix D
for information about ordering options.
Note
Printable Area
See
Figure A.1 (page A-6)
for printable area dimensions. (The printer cannot print outside the printable area.)
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-3
AUG-APPA Page 4 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
4510 and
4510ps Printer
Specifications
Imaging method
Electro-Photography
Exposure system
Semiconductor laser beam (laser diode) scanning
Image resolution
600 x 600 dpi and 300 x 300 dpi
Warm up time
Less than 60 seconds after power on
Continuous print speed
Processor
10 ppm (pages per minute)
20 MHz AMD 29200 RISC
Maximum Monthly Duty Cycle
Nominal voltage
Up to 20,000 prints
220/240 V
110/115 V
Nominal frequency
Power consumption
50/60 Hz
Less than 450 W during operation; power saver mode operational after
10 minutes of not printing
Noise level
Temperature
Less than 50 dB during operation and warm-up; less than 40 dB in standby
5
°
C / 41
°
F to 35
°
C / 95
°
F during operation
Humidity
15% to 85% during operation
Dimensions
Weight
Maximum memory capacity
35.2 x 39.4 x 25.4 cm
13.9 x 15.5 x 10 inches
14.0 Kgs / 31 lbs
16 MB
A-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPA Page 5 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Factory-provided features
Options
2 MB printer memory
One 250-sheet universal paper tray
Multipurpose (MP) paper tray
EP (electronic printing) cartridge
Power cord (110 volt printers only)
Document Services for Printing
software diskettes
User documentation
On the 4510ps printer:
Additional
4 MB SIMM
(for a total of 6 MB)
PostScript option
4 MB SIMM
16 MB SIMM
250-sheet Base with universal tray
500-sheet Base with A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray
Paper trays (in a variety of sizes)
PostScript kit
Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)
LocalTalk network interface card (XNIC-L’TALK)
Token Ring network interface card (XNIC-T’RING)
PCL font cards
See
Appendix D
for information about ordering options.
Note
Printable Area
See
Figure A.1 (page A-6)
for printable area dimensions. (The printer cannot print outside the printable area.)
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-5
AUG-APPA Page 6 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Figure A.1
PCL and PostScript printable area dimensions
Printer Language
PCL
Paper Size
All paper sizes
Printable Area
Width
Determined by the formula: W – 8.5 mm
(or W – .33 inch) where
W = physical paper width
PostScript
A4
8.5 x 11 (Letter)
Executive
8.5 x 14 (Legal)
Com-10
DL
Monarch
Folio
A5
B5 (ISO)
C5
7.89 inches
207 mm
8.11 inches
175 mm
6.93 inches
207 mm
8.11 inches
96 mm
3.73 inches
100 mm
3.95 inches
89 mm
3.52 inches
207 mm
8.11 inches
141 mm
5.55 inches
167 mm
6.61 inches
154 mm
6.08 inches
Printable Area
Length
Determined by the formula: L – 8.5 mm
(or L – .33 inch) where
L = physical paper width
289 mm
11.36 inches
271 mm
10.67 inches
258 mm
10.17 inches
347 mm
13.67 inches
233 mm
9.17 inches
212 mm
8.33 inches
182 mm
7.17 inches
347 mm
12.67 inches
200 mm
7.89 inches
241 mm
9.53 inches
220 mm
8.68 inches
A-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPA Page 7 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Cable
Specifications
Figure A.2 shows parallel and serial interface information to help you obtain the correct printer cable.
Figure A.2
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps parallel and serial cable characteristics
Type Commonly Used for
Communication
Protocol
Printer Connector
Type
Standard Centronics
Parallel
†
Cable
Standard Serial
‡
Cable
Most PC systems today
PCs and modems
Bidirectional
(Centronics standard)
RS-232C or
RS-422A
36-pin male
25-pin male
† Xerox has certified Parallel cables with these printers at a maximum of 6 feet.
‡ Xerox has certified Serial cables with these printers at a maximum of 4 feet.
Parallel Interface
Today most single-user computer systems (IBM PC and compatibles) utilize the parallel interface because it allows more data at a time to be transferred from the computer to the printer than does a serial interface. If the printer is not connected to a network, printing through the parallel interface is most desirable.
The printers support a bidirectional parallel port, compatible with the IEEE standard 1284-B, with forward transfer rates of
100 KBytes or 1 MBytes.
The FAULT signal (pin no. 32) goes true (low) under the following conditions:
• Off-line mode selected
• Cover open (interlock open)
• Paper out
• Paper jam
• Any machine fault
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-7
AUG-APPA Page 8 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The FAULT signal goes false (high) when all the above conditions are corrected.
The Centronics bidirectional parallel interface is designed to provide plug-to-plug compatibility with a 36 pin Amphenol
57-40360 (or equivalent) connector that connects to an
Amphenol 57-30360 (or equivalent) connector. The cable length has been certified at 6 feet, and will be the twisted pair type 22AWG -15 pairs. Pin assignment and functions for the
Centronics interface are designated in Figure A.3.
Figure A.3
Centronics connector pin assignment
Signal
Pin #
Signal Name Source
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
9
/ACK
BUSY
PE
SELECT
/AUTOFEED
N/C
GND
GND
/STROBE
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
HOST
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
PRINTER
PRINTER
PRINTER
PRINTER
HOST
- - - - - -
Function
Host Check
Data Bit 0
Data Bit 1
Data Bit 2
Data Bit 3
Data Bit 4
Data Bit 5
Data Bit 6
Data Bit 7
Printer Acknowledge
Printer Busy
Out of Paper
Printer Select
Host Busy
Not Defined
Logic GND
Chassis GND
A-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPA Page 9 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Figure A.3
Centronics connector pin assignment
(continued)
Signal
Pin #
Signal Name Source Function
23
24
25
26
27
18
19
20
21
22
28
29
30
31
32
33 - 35
36
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+ 5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
/INIT
/FAULT
N/C
/SELECTIN
PRINTER
HOST
PRINTER
- - - - - -
HOST
Printer Logic High
Signal GND (
/Strobe
)
Signal GND (
Data 0
)
Signal GND (
Data 1
)
Signal GND (
Data 2
)
Signal GND (
Data 3
)
Signal GND (
Data 4
)
Signal GND (
Data 5
)
Signal GND (
Data 6
)
Signal GND (
Data 7
)
Signal Ground (
PE, SELECT, /ACK
)
Signal Ground (
BUSY, /FAULT
)
Signal Ground (
AUTOFEED, /SELECTIN, /INIT
)
Reset Signal
Machine Status
Not Defined
Select Input
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-9
AUG-APPA Page 10 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
RS-232C Serial
Interface
(CCITT V.24)
The RS-232C Serial Interface complies with the EIA 232C standard which defines the interconnect of Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication Equipment
(DCE).
Data Rates
The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200 and 38400 baud.
Default setting is for 9600 baud
.
Encoding
Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or
8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1
Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7 or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI.
Default settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none
.
Protocols
Character protocols are used to regulate the flow of information between machine and host. The software handshaking protocol of XON/XOFF, Robust XON/XOFF, and DTR Polarity are available – DTR provides the hardware handshaking.
The default setting is for Robust XON/XOFF
.
Connections
The connector for the RS-232 interface is the 25 pin “D” Shell type. The use of short cables for interconnect is recommended. Cable length has been certified at 4 feet.
A-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPA Page 11 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The interface signals and their associated pin assignments are identified in the Figure A.4.
Figure A.4
Pin assignment for RS-232C
Signal Name Pin #
RS-232C
Function
Chassis GND
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Signal GND
Carrier Detect
N/C
Send Data Noninverted
Receive Data Noninverted
Send Data inverted
N/C
Receive Data Inverted
Data Terminal Ready
N/C
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
9, 10, 12
11
13
14
15, 17 – 19
16
20
21 – 25
GND
Data
Data
Control
Control
Control
GND
Control
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Control
- - - - - -
Direction
- - - - - -
From Printer
To Printer
From Printer
To Printer
To Printer
- - - - - -
To Printer
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
From Printer
- - - - - -
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-11
AUG-APPA Page 12 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
RS-422A Serial
Interface (CCITT
V.11 and X.27)
The RS-422A Serial Interface is hardware compatible with the EIA RS-422 standard which defines the interconnect of
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication
Equipment (DCE).
Data Rates
The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200 and 38400 baud.
Default setting is for 9600 baud
.
Encoding
Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or
8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1
Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7 or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI.
Default settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none
.
Protocols
XON/XOFF provides the software handshaking on the
RS-422 interface.
Robust XON/XOFF is the default
.
Connections
The connector for the RS-422A interface is the 25 pin “D”
Shell type. The use of short cables for interconnect is recommended. Cable length has been certified at 4 feet.
A-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPA Page 13 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The interface signals and their associated pin assignments are identified in the Figure A.5.
Figure A.5
Pin assignment for RS-422A
Signal Name Pin #
RS-422A
Function
Chassis GND
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Signal GND
Carrier Detect
N/C
Send Data Noninverted
Receive Data Noninverted
Send Data inverted
N/C
Receive Data Inverted
Data Terminal Ready
N/C
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
9, 10, 12
11
13
14
15, 17 – 19
16
20
21 – 25
GND
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
GND
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Data
Data
Data
- - - - - -
Data
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Direction
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
From Printer
To Printer
From Printer
- - - - - -
To Printer
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-13
AUG-APPA Page 14 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Null Modem
A null modem is a device that eliminates both a modem and a telephone line. When the printers are used with an asynchronous serial interface connected to a DTE host (such as a PC-compatible), a modem, modem eliminator, or a null modem is required. Figure A.6 shows null modem wiring.
Figure A.6
Null Modem wiring
Network Interface
Network interface communication is the most common for enabling multiple users to print from a host system.
For
network interface
cables, refer to your network software documentation.
A-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
Appendix B
Printer Commands
(Escape Sequences)
B x i d n e p p A
Xerox-Unique Settings
.........................................................
B-2
PCL Printer Commands
.........................................................
B-3
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands
.................................
B-21
Control Codes
.....................................................................
B-25
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-1
AUG-APPB Page 26 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
X e r o x - U n i q u e S e t t i n g s
B-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
PCL Printer
Commands
PCL printer commands—also called
escape sequences
—are used by software applications to
control how fonts and graphics are printed on the page
. Figure B.1 lists the PCL printer commands for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers.
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
Function Parameter Command Decimal Value
JOB CONTROL COMMANDS
Hexadecimal Value
Universal Exit
Language (ULE)
Reset
Number Of
Copies
—
—
# of Copies
Long Edge (Left)
Offset
Registration
# of Decipoints
(1/720”)
Short Edge
(Top) Offset
Registration
# of Decipoints
(1/720”)
Unit Of
Measure
# = Number of units per inch
Paper Source
E
C
%-12345X 027 037 045 049 050
051 052 053 088
E
C
E
E
C
&l#X
027 069
027 038 108 # ... # 088
1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35
58
1B 45
1B 26 6C # ... # 58
E
C
&l#U
E
C
&l#Z
E
C
&u#D
Reset
027 038 108 # ... # 085 1B 26 6C # ... # 55
027 038 108 # ... # 090 1B 26 6C # ... # 5A
027 038 117 # ... # 068 1B 26 75 # ... # 44
Eject Page
Main Paper
Source (Standard)
Manual Feed (MP)
Manual Envelope
Feed (MP)
Alternate Paper
Source (Lower)
PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS
Page Length and Size
E
C
&l0H
E
C
&l1H
027 038 108 048 072
027 038 108 049 072
E
C
&l2H
E
C
&l3H
E
C
&l4H
027 038 108 050 072
027 038 108 051 072
027 038 108 052 072
1B 26 6C 30 48
1B 26 6C 31 48
1B 26 6C 32 48
1B 26 6C 33 48
1B 26 6C 34 48
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-3
AUG-APPB Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Page Size
Parameter
Executive
Letter
Legal
A4
Command
E
C
&l1A
E
C
&l2A
E
C
&l3A
E
C
&l26A
Page Length
A5
Folio
Monarch
COM 10
DL
C5
B5 (ISO)
# of Lines
(5-128)
E
C
&l70A
E
C
&l71A
E
C
&l80A
E
C
&l81A
E
C
&l90A
E
C
&l91A
E
C
&l100A
E
C
&l#P
Decimal Value
027 038 108 049 065
027 038 108 050 065
027 038 108 051 065
027 038 108 050 054
065
027 038 108 050 048
048 048 065
027 038 108 051 048
048 049 065
027 038 108 056 048
065
027 038 108 056 049
065
027 038 108 057 048
065
027 038 108 057 049
065
027 038 108 049 048
048 065
027 038 108 #...# 080
Orientation
Orientation
Print Direction
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
E
C
&l0O
E
C
&l1O
E
C
&l2O
E
C
&l3O
E
C
&a#P # Degrees of
Rotation
(counterclockwise. 90
° increments only)
Hexadecimal Value
1B 26 6C 31 41
1B 26 6C 32 41
1B 26 6C 33 41
1B 26 6C 32 36 41
1B 26 6C 32 30 30 30 41
1B 26 6C 33 30 30 31 41
1B 26 6C 38 30 41
1B 26 6C 38 31 41
1B 26 6C 39 30 41
1B 26 6C 39 31 41
1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41
1B 26 6C #...# 050
027 038 108 048 079
027 038 108 049 079
027 038 108 050 079
027 038 108 051 079
1B 26 6C 30 4F
1B 26 6C 31 4F
1B 26 6C 32 4F
1B 26 6C 33 4F
027 038 097 # ... # 080 1B 26 61 # ... # 50
B-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Top Margin
Text Length
Left Margin
Right Margin
Clear
Horizontal
Margins
Parameter
# of Lines
# of Lines
# of Columns
# of Columns
—
Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value
Margins and Text Length
E
C
&l#E
E
C
&l#F
E
C
&a#L
E
C
&a#M
E
C
9
027 038 108 # ... # 069 1B 26 6C # ... # 45
027 038 108 # ... # 070 1B 26 6C # ... # 46
027 038 097 # ... # 076 1B 26 61 # ... # 4C
027 038 097 # ... # 077 1B 26 61 # ... # 4D
027 057 1B 39
Perforation Skip Disable
Enable
Horizontal
Motion Index
(HMI)
# of 1/120”
Increments
Perforation Skip Mode
E
C
&l0L
E
C
&l1L
027 038 108 048 076
027 038 108 049 076
Horizontal Column Spacing
E
C
&k#H
1B 26 6C 30 4C
1B 26 6C 31 4C
027 038 107 # ... # 072 1B 26 6B # ... # 48
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-5
AUG-APPB Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value
Vertical Line Spacing
E
C
&l#C 027 038 108 # ... # 067 1B 26 6C # ... # 43 Vertical Motion
Index (VMI)
Line Spacing
(Lines per inch)
# of 1/48”
Increments
1 line/inch
2 lines/inch
3 lines/inch
4 lines/inch
6 lines/inch
8 lines/inch
12 lines/inch
16 lines/inch
24 lines/inch
48 lines/inch
E
C
&l1D
E
C
&l2D
E
C
&l3D
E
C
&l4D
E
C
&l6D
E
C
&l8D
E
C
&l12D
027 038 108 049 068
027 038 108 050 068
027 038 108 051 068
027 038 108 052 068
027 038 108 054 068
027 038 108 056 068
027 038 108 049 050
068
E
C
&l16D
E
C
&l24D
027 038 108 049 054
068
027 038 108 050 052
068
E
C
&l48D 027 038 108 052 056
068
CURSOR POSITIONING
1B 26 6C 31 44
1B 26 6C 32 44
1B 26 6C 33 44
1B 26 6C 34 44
1B 26 6C 36 44
1B 26 6C 38 44
1B 26 6C 31 32 44
1B 26 6C 31 36 44
1B 26 6C 32 34 44
1B 26 6C 34 38 44
Vertical Position # of Rows
# of Units
Horizontal
Position
# of Decipoints
# of Columns
# of Units
# of Decipoints
Half Line Feed
Vertical and Horizontal
E
C
&a#R
E
C
*p#Y
E
C
&a#V
E
C
&a#C
E
C
*p#X
E
C
&a#H
E
C
=
027 038 097 # ... # 082 1B 26 61 # ... # 52
027 042 112 # ... # 089 1B 2A 70 # ... # 59
027 038 097 # ... # 086 1B 26 61 # ... # 56
027 038 097 # ... # 067 1B 26 61 # ... # 43
027 042 112 # ... # 088 1B 2A 70 # ... # 58
027 038 097 # ... # 072 1B 26 61 # ... # 48
027 061 1B 3D
B-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Line
Termination
Parameter Command Decimal Value
End-of-Line Termination
E
C
&k0G 027 038 107 048 071 CR=CR; LF=LF;
FF=FF
CR=CR+LF;
LF=LF; FF=FF
CR=CR;
LF=CR+LF;
FF=CR+FF
CR=CR+LF;
LF=CR+LF;
FF=CR+FF
E
C
&k1G
E
C
&k2G
E
C
&k3G
027 038 107 049 071
027 038 107 050 071
027 038 107 051 071
Push/Pop
Position
Push
Pop
Push/Pop Position
E
C
&f0S
E
C
&f1S
027 038 102 048 083
027 038 102 049 083
FONT SELECTION
Primary Symbol
Set
Symbol Set Selection
E
C
(0D 027 040 048 068 ISO 60:
Norwegian 1
ISO 4: United
Kingdom
Windows 3.1
Latin 2
ISO 69: French
ISO 21: German
ISO 15: Italian
Microsoft
Publishing
DeskTop
PS Text
E
C
(1E
E
C
(9E
E
C
(1F
E
C
(1G
E
C
(0I
E
C
(6J
E
C
(7J
E
C
(10J
027 040 049 069
027 040 057 069
027 040 049 070
027 040 049 071
027 040 048 073
027 040 054 074
027 040 055 074
027 040 049 048 074
Hexadecimal Value
1B 26 6B 30 47
1B 26 6B 31 47
1B 26 6B 32 47
1B 26 6B 33 47
1B 26 66 30 53
1B 26 66 31 53
1B 28 30 44
1B 28 31 45
1B 28 39 45
1B 28 31 46
1B 28 31 47
1B 28 30 49
1B 28 36 4A
1B 28 37 4A
1B 28 31 30 4A
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-7
AUG-APPB Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter
MC Text
Ventura
International
Ventura US
Wingdings
Command
E
C
(12J
E
C
(13J
E
C
(14J
E
C
(579L
PS Math
Ventura Math
Math-8
Symbol
ISO 8859-1
(ECMA-94) Latin 1
E
C
(5M
E
C
(6M
E
C
(8M
E
C
(19M
E
C
(0N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
ISO 11: Swedish
ISO 17: Spanish
Windows 3.1
Latin 5
E
C
(2N
E
C
(5N
E
C
(0S
E
C
(2S
E
C
(5T
PC Turkish
ISO 6: ASCII
Legal
Roman-8
E
C
(9T
E
C
(0U
E
C
(1U
E
C
(8U
E
C
(9U Windows 3.0
Latin 1
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC 850
E
C
(10U
E
C
(11U
E
C
(12U
Decimal Value
027 040 049 050 074
027 040 049 051 074
027 040 049 052 074
027 040 053 055 057
076
027 040 053 077
027 040 054 077
027 040 056 077
027 040 049 057 077
027 040 048 078
027 040 050 078
027 040 053 078
027 040 048 083
027 040 050 083
027 040 053 084
027 040 057 084
027 040 048 085
027 040 049 085
027 040 056 085
027 040 057 085
027 040 049 048 085
027 040 049 049 085
027 040 049 050 085
Hexadecimal Value
1B 28 31 32 4A
1B 28 31 33 4A
1B 28 31 34 4A
1B 28 35 37 39 4C
1B 28 35 4D
1B 28 36 4D
1B 28 38 4D
1B 28 31 39 4D
1B 28 30 4E
1B 28 32 4E
1B 28 35 4E
1B 28 30 53
1B 28 32 53
1B 28 35 54
1B 28 39 54
1B 28 30 55
1B 28 31 55
1B 28 38 55
1B 28 39 55
1B 28 31 30 55
1B 28 31 31 55
1B 28 31 32 55
B-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter
Pi Font
PC-852
Command
E
C
(15U
E
C
(17U
E
C
(19U
Decimal Value
027 040 049 053 085
027 040 049 055 085
Hexadecimal Value
1B 28 31 35 55
1B 28 31 37 55
Windows 3.1
Latin 1 (ANSI)
027 040 049 057 085 1B 28 31 39 55
Spacing
Primary Spacing Fixed
Proportional
E
C
(s0P
E
C
(s1P
027 040 115 048 080
027 040 115 049 080
Pitch
1B 28 73 30 50
1B 28 73 31 50
Primary Pitch # Characters/inch
Set Pitch Mode 10.0
E
C
(s#H
E
C
&k0S
E
C
&k2S
027 040 115 # ... # 072 1B 28 73 # ... # 48
027 038 107 048 083 1B 26 6B 30 53
Compressed
(16.5-16.7)
Elite (12.0)
Primary Height # Points
Primary Style
E
C
&k4S 027 038 107 052 083
Point Size
E
C
(s#V
1B 26 6B 34 53
027 040 115 # ... # 086 1B 28 73 # ... # 56
Style
Upright (Solid)
Italic
Condensed
Condensed Italic
Compressed (Extra
Condensed)
E
C
(s0S
E
C
(s1S
E
C
(s4S
E
C
(s5S
E
C
(s8S
Expanded
E
C
(s24S
027 040 115 048 083
027 040 115 049 083
027 040 115 052 083
027 040 115 053 083
027 040 115 056 083
1B 28 73 30 53
1B 28 73 31 53
1B 28 73 34 53
1B 28 73 35 53
1B 28 73 38 53
1B 28 73 32 34 53
Outline
E
C
(s32S
027 038 107 050 083
027 040 115 050 052
083
027 040 115 051 050
083
1B 26 6B 32 53
1B 28 73 33 32 53
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-9
AUG-APPB Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Primary Font
Stroke Weight
Parameter
Inline
Shadowed
Outline Shadowed
E
C
(s160S
Ultra Thin
Extra Thin
Thin
Extra Light
Light
Demi Light
Semi Light
Medium (book or text)
027 040 115 049 054
048 083
E
C
(s-7B
Stroke Weight
027 040 115 045 055
066
E
C
(s-6B 027 040 115 045 054
066
E
C
(s-5B 027 040 115 045 053
066
E
C
(s-4B 027 040 115 045 052
066
E
C
(s-3B 027 040 115 045 051
066
E
C
(s-2B 027 040 115 045 050
066
E
C
(s-1B 027 040 115 045 049
066
E
C
(s0B 027 040 115 048 066
Semi Bold
Demi Bold
Bold
Extra Bold
Black
Extra Black
Ultra Black
Command
E
C
(s64S
E
C
(s128S
E
C
(s1B
E
C
(s2B
E
C
(s3B
E
C
(s4B
E
C
(s5B
E
C
(s6B
E
C
(s7B
Decimal Value
027 040 115 054 052
083
027 040 115 049 050
056 083
027 040 115 049 066
027 040 115 050 066
027 040 115 051 066
027 040 115 052 066
027 040 115 053 066
027 040 115 054 066
027 040 115 055 066
Hexadecimal Value
1B 28 73 36 34 53
1B 28 73 31 32 38 53
1B 28 73 31 36 30 53
1B 28 73 2D 37 42
1B 28 73 2D 36 42
1B 28 73 2D 35 42
1B 28 73 2D 34 42
1B 28 73 2D 33 42
1B 28 73 2D 32 42
1B 28 73 2D 31 42
1B 28 73 30 42
1B 28 73 31 42
1B 28 73 32 42
1B 28 73 33 42
1B 28 73 34 42
1B 28 73 35 42
1B 28 73 36 42
1B 28 73 37 42
B-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter Command Decimal Value
Typeface Family LinePrinter
Albertus
Antique Olive
Clarendon
Coronet
Courier
Garamond
Antiqua
Letter Gothic
Marigold
CG Omega
CG Times
Univers
Arial
Times New Roman
Symbol
Primary Typeface Family
E
C
(s0T
E
C
(s4362T
027 040 115 048 084
027 040 115 052 051
054 050 084
E
C
(s4168T 027 040 115 052 049
054 056 084
E
C
(s4140T 027 040 115 052 049
052 048 084
E
C
(s4116T 027 040 115 052 049
049 054 084
E
C
(s4099T 027 040 115 052 048
057 057 084
E
C
(s4197T 027 040 115 052 049
057 055 084
E
C
(s4102T 027 040 115 052 049
048 050 084
E
C
(s4297T 027 040 115 052 050
057 055 084
E
C
(s4113T 027 040 115 052 049
049 051 084
E
C
(s4101T 027 040 115 052 049
048 049 084
E
C
(s4148T 027 040 115 052 049
052 056 084
E
C
(s16602T 027 040 115 049 054
054 048 050 084
E
C
(s16901T 027 040 115 049 054
057 048 049 084
E
C
(s16686T 027 040 115 049 054
054 056 054 084
Hexadecimal Value
1B 28 73 30 54
1B 28 73 34 33 36 32 54
1B 28 73 34 31 36 38 54
1B 28 73 34 31 34 30 54
1B 28 73 34 31 31 36 54
1B 28 73 34 30 39 39 54
1B 28 73 34 31 39 37 54
1B 28 73 34 31 30 32 54
1B 28 73 34 32 39 37 54
1B 28 73 34 31 31 33 54
1B 28 73 34 31 30 31 54
1B 28 73 34 31 34 38 54
1B 28 73 31 36 36 30 32
54
1B 28 73 31 36 39 30 31
54
1B 28 73 31 36 36 38 36
54
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-11
AUG-APPB Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Font Default
Underline
Transparent
Print Data
Parameter
Wingdings
Primary Font
Secondary Font
Enable Fixed
Enable Floating
Disable
# of Bytes
Command
E
C
(s31402T
Decimal Value
027 040 115 051 049
052 048 050 084
Hexadecimal Value
1B 28 73 33 31 34 30 32
54
Font Default
E
C
(3@
E
C
)3@
027 040 051 064
027 041 051 064
Underline
E
C
&d0D
E
C
&d3D
E
C
&d@
027 038 100 048 068
027 038 100 051 068
027 038 100 064
Transparent Print
1B 28 33 40
1B 29 33 40
1B 26 64 30 44
1B 26 64 33 44
1B 26 64 40
E
C
&p#X[Data] 027 038 112 # ... # 088 1B 26 70 # ... # 58
Assign Font ID
Font and
Character
Control
Font ID #
Delete all Fonts
FONT MANAGEMENT
E
C
*c#D
E
C
*c0F
E
C
*c1F
027 042 099 # ... # 068 1B 2A 63 # ... # 44
027 042 099 048 070
027 042 099 049 070
1B 2A 63 30 46
1B 2A 63 31 46 Delete all temporary fonts
Delete last font ID specified
E
C
*c2F
Delete last character specified
E
C
*c3F
027 042 099 050 070
027 042 099 051 070
1B 2A 63 32 46
1B 2A 63 33 46
Make font temporary
E
C
*c4F 027 042 099 052 070 1B 2A 63 34 46
Make font permanent
E
C
*c5F 027 042 099 053 070 1B 2A 63 35 46
Copy/Assign the currently invoked font as temporary
E
C
*c6F 027 042 099 054 070 1B 2A 63 36 46
B-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value
Set Symbol Set ID #
Define Symbol
Set
# of Bytes
Soft Symbol Set Management / Creation
E
C
*c#R 027 042 099 # ... # 082 1B 2A 63 # ... # 52
E
C
(f#W[Data] 027 040 102 # ... # 087 1B 28 66 # ... # 57
Symbol Set
Control
Delete all symbol sets
E
C
*c0S 027 042 099 048 083 1B 2A 63 30 53
Delete all temporary symbol sets
E
C
*c1S 027 042 099 049 083 1B 2A 63 31 53
Delete current soft symbol set (last ID
#)
E
C
*c2S 027 042 099 050 083 1B 2A 63 32 53
Make current soft symbol set temporary
E
C
*c4S 027 042 099 052 083 1B 2A 63 34 53
Make current soft symbol set permanent
E
C
*c5S 027 042 099 053 083 1B 2A 63 35 53
Select Font
(with ID #)
ID # primary font
ID # secondary font
Font Selection by ID Number
E
C
(#X
E
C
)#X
027 040 # ... # 088
027 041 # ... # 088
# of bytes
1B 28 # ... # 58
1B 29 # ... # 58
SOFT FONT CREATION
E
C
)s#W[Data] 027 041 115 # ... # 087 1B 29 73 # ... # 57 Font Descriptor
(font header)
Download character
# of bytes
E
C
(s#W[Data] 027 040 115 # ... # 087 1B 28 73 # ... # 57
Character code Character code #
(decimal)
E
C
*c#E 027 042 099 # ... # 069 1B 2A 63 # ... # 45
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-13
AUG-APPB Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter Command
GRAPHICS
Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value
Raster
Resolution
75 dots/inch
100 dots/inch
150 dots/inch
200 dots/inch
300 dots/inch
600 dots/inch
Raster Graphics
Presentation
Follows orientation
Follows physical page
E
C
*r3F
Start Raster
Graphics
Left Raster
Graphics Margin
E
C
*r0A
Current Cursor
Raster Y Offset # of Raster Lines of vertical movement
Set Raster
Compression
Mode (Method)
E
C
*r1A
E
C
*b#Y
Unencoded
Run-Length
Encoded
E
C
*b0M
E
C
*b1M
Tagged Image File
Format
Delta Row
E
C
*b2M
E
C
*b3M
Raster Graphics
E
C
*t75R 027 042 116 055 053
082
E
C
*t100R 027 042 116 049 048
048 082
E
C
*t150R 027 042 116 049 053
048 082
E
C
*t200R 027 042 116 050 048
048 082
E
C
*t300R 027 042 116 051 048
048 082
E
C
*t600R 027 042 116 054 048
048 082
E
C
*r0F 027 042 114 048 070
027 042 114 051 070
027 042 114 048 065
1B 2A 74 37 35 52
1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52
1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52
1B 2A 72 30 46
1B 2A 72 33 46
1B 2A 72 30 41
027 042 114 049 065 1B 2A 72 31 41
027 042 098 # ... # 089 1B 2A 62 # ... # 59
027 042 098 048 077
027 042 098 049 077
027 042 098 050 077
027 042 098 051 077
1B 2A 62 30 4D
1B 2A 62 31 4D
1B 2A 62 32 4D
1B 2A 62 33 4D
B-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter Command
E
C
*b5M Adaptive compression
# of Bytes Transfer Raster
Data by row
End Raster
Graphics
Raster Height
Raster Width
Old version preferred
# Raster Rows
# Pixels of the
Specified
Resolution
]
E
C
*b#W[Data
E
C
*rB
E
C
*rC
E
C
*r#T
E
C
*r#S
Decimal Value
027 042 098 053 077
Hexadecimal Value
1B 2A 62 35 4D
027 042 098 # ... # 087 1B 2A 62 # ... # 57
027 042 114 066
027 042 114 067
1B 2A 72 42
1B 2A 72 43
027 042 114 # ... # 084 1B 2A 72 # ... # 54
027 042 114 # ... # 083 1B 2A 72 # ... # 53
Select Current
Pattern
THE PRINT MODEL
Imaging
E
C
*v0T 027 042 118 048 084 1B 2A 76 30 54
Source
Transparency
Mode
Pattern
Transparency
Mode
Solid Black
(default)
Solid White
HP-defined
Shading Pattern
HP-defined
Cross-Hatched
Pattern
User-defined pattern
Transparent
Opaque
Transparent
Opaque
E
C
*v1T
E
C
*v2T
E
C
*v3T
E
C
*v4T
E
C
*v0N
E
C
*v1N
E
C
*v0O
E
C
*v1O
027 042 118 049 084
027 042 118 050 084
027 042 118 051 084
027 042 118 052 084
027 042 118 048 078
027 042 118 049 078
027 042 118 048 079
027 042 118 049 079
1B 2A 76 31 54
1B 2A 76 32 54
1B 2A 76 33 54
1B 2A 76 34 54
1B 2A 76 30 4E
1B 2A 76 31 4E
1B 2A 76 30 4F
1B 2A 76 31 4F
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-15
AUG-APPB Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value
Rectangle
Width
(Horizontal Size)
# of dots
# of decipoints
Rectangle
Height
(Vertical Size)
Fill Rectangular
Area
Pattern ID
Shading
# of dots
# of decipoints
Solid Black
Erase (solid white fill)
Shaded Fill
Cross-hatched Fill
User-Defined
Current Pattern
% of Shading or
Type of Pattern or
User Pattern ID
2% Gray
10% Gray
E
C
*c2P
E
C
*c3P
E
C
*c4P
E
C
*c5P
E
C
*c#G
E
C
E
C
*c2G
*c10G
15% Gray
Rectangle Dimensions
E
C
*c#A
E
C
*c#H
027 042 099 # ... # 065 1B 2A 63 # ... # 41
027 042 099 # ... # 072 1B 2A 63 # ... # 48
E
C
*c#B
E
C
*c#V
E
C
*c0P
E
C
*c1P
027 042 099 # ... # 066 1B 2A 63 # ... # 42
027 042 099 # ... # 086 1B 2A 63 # ... # 56
027 042 099 048 080
027 042 099 049 080
1B 2A 63 30 50
1B 2A 63 31 50
E
C
*c15G
027 042 099 050 080
027 042 099 051 080
027 042 099 052 080
027 042 099 053 080 1B 2A 63 35 50
027 042 099 # ... # 071 1B 2A 63 # ... # 47
027 042 099 050 071
027 042 099 049 048
071
027 042 099 049 053
071
1B 2A 63 32 50
1B 2A 63 33 50
1B 2A 63 34 50
1B 2A 63 32 47
1B 2A 63 31 30 47
1B 2A 63 31 35 47
30% Gray
E
C
*c30G 1B 2A 63 33 30 47
45% Gray
70% Gray
90% Gray
E
C
*c45G
E
C
*c70G
E
C
*c90G
027 042 099 051 048
071
027 042 099 052 053
071
027 042 099 055 048
071
027 042 099 057 048
071
1B 2A 63 34 35 47
1B 2A 63 37 30 47
1B 2A 63 39 30 47
B-16
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Pattern
Define Pattern
User-Defined
Pattern Control
Set Pattern
Reference
Point
Parameter
100% Gray
1 Horiz. Line
2 Vert. Lines
3 Diagonal Lines
4 Diagonal Lines
5 Square Grid
6 Diagonal Grid
E
C
*c1G
E
C
*c2G
E
C
*c3G
E
C
*c4G
E
C
*c5G
E
C
*c6G
027 042 099 049 071
027 042 099 050 071
027 042 099 051 071
027 042 099 052 071
027 042 099 053 071
027 042 099 054 071
1B 2A 63 31 47
1B 2A 63 32 47
1B 2A 63 33 47
1B 2A 63 34 47
1B 2A 63 35 47
1B 2A 63 36 47
USER-DEFINED PATTERN / MANAGEMENT CREATION
# of bytes
Delete all patterns
Delete all temporary patterns
Delete current pattern
Make pattern temporary
Make pattern permanent
Rotate with orientation
Follow physical page
Command
E
C
*c100G
]
E
C
*c#W[Data
E
C
*c0Q
E
C
*c1Q
E
C
*c2Q
E
C
*c4Q
E
C
*c5Q
E
C
*p0R
E
C
*p1R
Decimal Value
027 042 099 049 048
048 071
Hexadecimal Value
1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47
027 042 099 # ... # 087 1B 2A 63 # ... # 57
027 042 099 048 081
027 042 099 049 081
027 042 099 050 081
027 042 099 052 081
027 042 099 053 081
027 042 112 048 082
027 042 112 049 082
1B 2A 63 30 51
1B 2A 63 31 51
1B 2A 63 32 51
1B 2A 63 34 51
1B 2A 63 35 51
1B 2A 70 30 52
1B 2A 70 31 52
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-17
AUG-APPB Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Macro ID
Macro Control
Set Status
Readback
Location Type
Parameter
Macro ID #
Start Macro Def.
Stop Macro Def.
Execute Macro
Call Macro
Enable Overlay
Disable Overlay
Delete Macros
Delete All Temp.
Macros
Delete Macro ID
Make Temporary
Make Permanent
Invalid Location
Command
E
C
&f#Y
E
C
&f0X
E
C
&f1X
E
C
&f2X
E
C
&f3X
E
C
&f4X
E
C
&f5X
E
C
&f6X
E
C
&f7X
E
C
&f8X
E
C
&f9X
E
C
&f10X
MACROS
Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value
027 038 102 # ... # 089 1B 26 66 # ... # 59
027 038 102 048 088
027 038 102 049 088
027 038 102 050 088
1B 26 66 30 58
1B 26 66 31 58
1B 26 66 32 58
027 038 102 051 088
027 038 102 052 088
027 038 102 053 088
027 038 102 054 088
027 038 102 055 088
1B 26 66 33 58
1B 26 66 34 58
1B 26 66 35 58
1B 26 66 36 58
1B 26 66 37 58
027 038 102 056 088
027 038 102 057 088
027 038 102 049 048
088
STATUS READBACK
E
C
*s0T 027 042 115 048 084
1B 26 66 38 58
1B 26 66 39 58
1B 26 66 31 30 58
1B 2A 73 30 54
Currently Selected
All Locations
Internal
Downloaded
Cartridge
User-Installed
ROM (SIMMs)
E
C
*s1T
E
C
*s2T
E
C
*s3T
E
C
*s4T
E
C
*s5T
E
C
*s7T
027 042 115 049 084
027 042 115 050 084
027 042 115 051 084
027 042 115 052 084
027 042 115 053 084
027 042 115 055 084
1B 2A 73 31 54
1B 2A 73 32 54
1B 2A 73 33 54
1B 2A 73 34 54
1B 2A 73 35 54
1B 2A 73 37 54
B-18
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function
Set Status
Readback
Location Unit
Parameter
All entities of the
Location Type
Entity 1 or
Temporary
Entity 2 or
Permanent
Entity 3
Command
E
C
*s0U
E
C
*s1U
E
C
*s2U
Decimal Value
027 042 115 048 085
027 042 115 049 085
027 042 115 050 085
Hexadecimal Value
1B 2A 73 30 55
1B 2A 73 31 55
1B 2A 73 32 55
Inquire Status
Readback Entity
Entity 4
Font
Macro
User-defined
Pattern
Symbol Set
E
C
*s3U
E
C
*s4U
E
C
*s0I
E
C
*s1I
E
C
*s2I
027 042 115 051 085
027 042 115 052 085
027 042 115 048 073
027 042 115 049 073
027 042 115 050 073
1B 2A 73 33 55
1B 2A 73 34 55
1B 2A 73 30 49
1B 2A 73 31 49
1B 2A 73 32 49
Font Extended
Flush All Pages Flush All complete pages
Flush All Page
Data
— Free Memory
Space
Echo
End-Of-Line
Wrap
Display
Functions
E
C
*s3I
E
C
*s4I
E
C
&r0F
E
C
&r1F
E
C
*s1M
027 042 115 051 073
027 042 115 052 073
027 038 114 048 070
027 038 114 049 070
027 042 115 049 077
1B 2A 73 33 49
1B 2A 73 34 49
1B 26 72 30 46
1B 26 72 31 46
1B 2A 73 31 4D
# = Echo value
(-32767 to 32767)
E
C
*s#X
Enabled
Disabled
ON
OFF
027 042 115 # ... # 088 1B 2A 73 # ... # 58
PROGRAMMING HINTS
E
C
&s0C
E
C
&s1C
E
C
Y
E
C
Z
027 038 115 048 067
027 038 115 049 067
027 089
027 090
1B 26 73 30 43
1B 26 73 31 43
1B 59
1B 5A
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-19
AUG-APPB Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1
PCL printer commands
(continued)
Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value
PCL VECTOR GRAPHICS SWITCHING/SET-UP PICTURE FRAME
Enter PCL Mode Use previous PCL cursor position
E
C
%0A 027 037 048 065 1B 25 30 41
E
C
%1A 027 037 049 065 1B 25 31 41 Use current
HP-GL/2 pen position for cursor position
Enter HP-GL/2
Mode
Use Previous
HP-GL/2 pen position
E
C
%0B 027 037 048 066 1B 25 30 42
Use current PCL cursor position
E
C
%1B 027 037 049 066 1B 25 31 42
HP-GL/2 Plot
Horizontal Size
Horizontal size in inches
E
C
*c#K 027 042 099 # ... # 075 1B 2A 63 # ... # 4B
HP-GL/2 Plot
Vertical Size
Vertical size in inches
E
C
*c#L 027 042 099 # ... # 076 1B 2A 63 # ... # 4C
Set Picture
Frame Anchor
Point
Set anchor point to cursor position
E
C
*c0T 027 042 099 048 084 1B 2A 63 30 54
Picture Frame
Horizontal Size
Decipoints
E
C
*c#X 027 042 099 # ... # 088 1B 2A 63 # ... # 58
Picture Frame
Vertical Size
Decipoints
E
C
*c#Y 027 042 099 # ... # 089 1B 2A 63 # ... # 59
B-20
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 21 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
HP-GL/2
Context
Printer
Commands
In Figure B.2, parameters in brackets [] are optional.
Figure B.2
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands
Command Mnemonic
Enter PCL Mode
Reset
Primary Font
Secondary Font
Scalable Or Bitmapped Fonts
Parameters
DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS
Esc%#A
EscE
0 - Retain previous PCL cursor position
1 - Use current HP-GL/2 pen position
None
F1
FN
SB
Font_ID
Font_ID
0 - Scalable fonts only
1 - Bitmapped fonts allowed
PALETTE EXTENSIONS
Transparency Mode
Screened Vectors
Arc Absolute
Arc Relative
Absolute Arc Three Point
Bezier Absolute
TR 0 - Off (opaque)
1 - On (transparent)
SV [screen_type[,shading[,index]]]
VECTOR GROUP
AA
AR
AT
BZ x_center, y_center, sweep_angle [,chord_angle]; x_increment, y_increment, sweep-angle
[,chord_angle]; x_inter, y_inter, x_end, y_end [,chord_angle]; x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt . . .
[x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt];
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-21
AUG-APPB Page 22 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.2
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands
(continued)
Command
Bezier Relative
Plot Absolute
Plot Relative
Pen Down
Pen Up
Relative Arc Three Point
Polyline Encoded
Mnemonic
BR
PA
PR
PD
PU
Parameters
x1_control_pt_increments, y1_control_pt_increments, x2_control_pt_increments, y2_control_pt_increments x3_control_pt_increments, y3_control_pt_increments . . .
[x1_control_pt_increments, y1_control_pt_increments, x2_control_pt_increments, y2_control_pt_increments, x3_control_pt_increments, y3_control_pt_increments];
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
RT
PE x_incr_inter, y_incr_inter, x_incr_end, y_incr_end
[,chord_angle];
[flag[val]|coord_pair . . . [flag[val]|coord_pair]];
POLYGON GROUP
Circle
Fill Rectangle Absolute
Fill Rectangle Relative
Edge Rectangle Absolute
Edge Rectangle Relative
Fill Wedge
Edge Wedge
Polygon Mode
Fill Polygon
Edge Polygon
CI
RA
EW
PM
FP
RR
EA
ER
WG
EP radius [,chord_angle]; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [,chord_angle]; radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [,chord_angle]; polygon_definition;
0 - Odd/Even
1 - non-zero winding
None
B-22
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 23 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.2
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands
(continued)
Command Mnemonic
CHARACTER GROUP
Select Standard Font
Select Alternate Font
Absolute Direction
Relative Direction
Absolute Character Size
Relative Character Size
Character Slant
Extra Space
Standard Font Definition
Alternate Font Definition
Character Fill Mode
Label Origin
Label
Define Label Terminator
Character Plot
Transparent Data
Define Variable Text Path
AD
CF
LO
LB
DT
CP
TD
DV
SS
SA
DI
DR
SI
SR
SL
ES
SD
Parameters
None
None
[run, rise];
[run, rise];
[width, height];
[width, height];
[tangent_of_angle];
[width [,height]]
[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];
[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];
[fill_mode [,edge_pen]];
[position];
[char . . . [char]]1bterm
[1bterm [,mode]];
[spaces, lines];
[mode];
[path [,line]];
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-23
AUG-APPB Page 24 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.2
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands
(continued)
Command Mnemonic
LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP
Parameters
Line Type
Line Attributes
Pen Width
Pen Width Unit Selection
Select Pen
Symbol Mode
Fill Type
Anchor Corner
Raster Fill Definition
User Defined Line Type
Scale
Input Window
Input P1 and P2
Input Relative P1 and P2
Default Values
Initialize
Rotate Coordinate System
SM
FT
AC
RF
LT
LA
PW
WU
SP
UL
CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP
SC
DF
IN
RO
IW
IP
IR
[line_type [,pattern_length [,mode]]];
[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];
[width [,pen]];
[type];
[pen];
(required, 1 for black (recommended) or 0 for white)
[char];
[fill_type [,option1 [,option2]]];
[x_coordinate, y_coordinate];
[index [,width, height, pen_nbr . . . pen_nbr]];
(width and height must be less than 255)
[index [,gap1 . . . gapn]];
[x1, x2, y1, y2 [,type [,left, bottom]]]; or
[x1,xfactor,y1,yfactor,2];
[xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR];
[p1x, p1y [,p2x, p2y]];
[p1x, p1y [,p2x, p2y]];
None
[n];
[angle];
B-24
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPB Page 25 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
C o n t r o l C o d e s
Control Codes
Figure B.3
Control Codes
Function Symbol
Backspace B
S
Horizontal Tab H
T
Line Feed
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Shift Out
Shift In
Escape
Space
L
F
F
F
C
R
S
O
S
I
E
C
S
P
Decimal
Value
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
27
32
Description
Move one column left unless at left margin, in which case no action is taken.
Move to next horizontal tab stop. The tab stops are at the left margin, and every eight columns to the right of the left margin.
Move to next print line while maintaining current column position.
Move to the first line at top of the next page while maintaining current column position.
Move to left margin on the current print line.
Select characters that follow from the current secondary font until receipt of a Shift In.
Select characters that follow from the current primary font until receipt of a Shift Out.
Indicates the beginning of a special control sequence (escape sequence).
Move one column to the right unless already at the right margin, in which case no action is taken.
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-25
AUG-APPB Page 26 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM
B-26
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPC Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM
Appendix C
I/O Port Polling
C x i d n e p p A
A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g
❖
C-1
AUG-APPC Page 2 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM
The 4505/4505ps printers provide a parallel port, serial port, and
one
additional network interface port option,
all of which may be active at the same time
.
The 4510/4510ps printers provide a parallel port, serial port, and
three
additional network interface port options,
all of which may be active at the same time
.
To coordinate automatic switching among the ports, the printer monitors the parallel, serial, and network interface ports for incoming data. When a print job is detected on one port, the printer sends a busy signal to the other ports and queues the print job into memory for processing. This is called
port polling
. Note that while all ports may be simultaneously active, only one port at a time is able to receive a print job.
For the 4505/4505ps printers:
When print jobs are pending on all three ports (parallel, serial, and the network interface port), the port polling sequence is:
1 Parallel
2 Serial
3 Network
4 Back to Parallel
C-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPC Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM
For the 4510/4510ps printers:
When print jobs are pending on all five ports (parallel, serial, and the network interface ports), the port polling sequence is:
1 Parallel
2 Serial
3 Ethernet
4 Token Ring
5 Back to Parallel
Note
LocalTalk
is not a part of this sequence. When a print job is detected on the LocalTalk port, the print job is put in the queue immediately after any current job finishes.
Except for those on the LocalTalk interface,
print jobs are processed in the sequence in which they are received by the printer
. As soon as one print job has finished, the printer continues polling until it finds another port that has received data.
If a print job is incomplete, the printer waits until the port is inactive for the
Port Timeout
period. After that, the printer ends the incomplete job and continues polling the ports when either:
•
Auto Job End
is
On
or
• Another print job is received on a port
Therefore, the printer does not excessively service one particular port.
A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g
❖
C-3
AUG-APPC Page 4 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM
You may set the
Port Timeout
period and
Auto Job End
on the Control Panel or with the RUI. For additional information on
Port Timeout
or
Auto Job End
, either see
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel
, or refer to the
Document Services for
Printing Guide
.
C-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPD Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
Appendix D
Ordering Information
D x i d n e p p A
Printer Options
....................................................................
D-2
Additional Order Items
.......................................................
D-7
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-1
AUG-APPD Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Printer
Options
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to order any of the printer options listed in Figure D.1.
Note
4505ps and 4510ps Users:
The 4505ps and 4510ps come with these options pre-installed:
• 4 MB SIMM (for a total of 6 MB memory)
• PostScript card
Figure D.1
Printer options
Option/Part No.
Description
Printer Memory
(SIMM)
97K15280 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
4 MB SIMM
97K15300 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
16 MB SIMM
Comments
TO INSTALL, go to:
Chapter 5
.
SIMM requirements:
• No parity
• 70 nanosecond access time
• 8 bits
• One-sided
It is recommended that you use a SIMM manufactured by Xerox / Rank Xerox. However, other SIMMs are widely available. Be sure you purchase the correct SIMM configuration.
Note
Even though up to two 16 MB
SIMMs can be installed, the printer recognizes a maximum of 16 MB.
D-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPD Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1
Printer options
(continued)
Option/Part No.
Description
PostScript
97K15510 English (Xerox)
97K19490 English (Rank Xerox)
97K19500 French
97K19510 German
97K19520 Italian
97K19290 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19530 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
4505 Adobe PostScript
Level 2 language interpreter
Comments
TO INSTALL, go to:
Installation instructions packaged with the option
.
A minimum of 6 MB of memory is required, comprised of 2 MB resident base memory plus one 4 MB SIMM purchased separately. (See
Printer Memory
option, above.)
97K17430 English (Xerox)
97K19790 English (Rank Xerox)
97K19800 French
97K19810 German
97K19820 Italian
97K19300 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19830 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
4510 Adobe PostScript
Level 2 language interpreter
Font Cards
Contact Xerox / Rank Xerox
English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
TO INSTALL, go to:
Chapter 5
.
For PCL5e only.
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-3
AUG-APPD Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1
Printer options
(continued)
Option/Part No.
Description Comments
Network Interfaces
97K15330 English (Xerox)
97K19610 English (Rank Xerox)
97K19620 French
97K19630 German
97K19640 Italian
97K19270 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19650 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Ethernet card
(with BNC and RJ-45 connectors)
97K15320 English (Xerox)
97K19550 English (Rank Xerox)
97K19560 French
97K19570 German
97K19580 Italian
97K19260 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19590 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
LocalTalk card
(with a DIN-8 connector)
97K15340 English (Xerox)
97K19670 English (Rank Xerox)
97K19680 French
97K19690 German
97K19700 Italian
97K19280 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19710 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Token Ring card
(with RJ-45 and female DE-9 connectors)
TO INSTALL, go to:
Installation instructions packaged with the option
.
Ethernet
card includes protocols: Novell
NetWare, TCP/IP, EtherTalk, DEC LAT, and LAN
Manager.
Token Ring
card includes protocols: Novell
NetWare and LAN Manager.
Novell
systems require Print Server v1.2 and above, in the form of:
• PSERVER.VAP for v2.x NetWare file servers
• PSERVER.NLM for v3.x NetWare file servers
• PSERVER.EXE for a stand-alone
PC-based print server
UNIX TCP/IP
systems require:
• Support for lpd or rprint
(Xerox-supplied)
• Clients must support TCP/IP,
TELNET, and UDP
• Optional load hosts require TFTP or
RARP protocols
EtherTalk
systems require AppleTalk Phase 2.
DEC LAT
systems require that clients support the LAT protocol under the VAX/VMS or
ULTRIX-32 operating systems.
LAN Manager
systems require:
• OS/2 version 1.30 or above
• Microsoft’s LAN Manager version
2.1 and above
• TCP/IP on the LAN Manager server
D-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPD Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1
Printer options
(continued)
Option/Part No.
Description Comments
PAPER HANDLING OPTIONS
Paper Trays
(For paper sizes, refer to the
Chapter 2: Handling Paper
.)
TO INSTALL, go to:
Chapter 2
.
109R00029 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
250-sheet Universal Tray
†
Adjustable to:
• A4
• 8.5 x 11 (Letter)
• A5
• Executive
• A4 Transparency or Label
• 8.5 x 11 (Letter) Transparency or Label
109R00031 English (Xerox)
Spanish (Xerox)
250-sheet 8.5 x 14
(Legal) Tray
†
109R00026 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
30-Envelope Tray
†
Adjustable to:
• 8.5 x 11 (Letter)
• 8.5 x 13 (Folio)
• 8.5 x 14 (Legal)
Adjustable to:
• COM-10
• Monarch
• DL
• C5
109R00024 English (Xerox)
Spanish (Xerox)
109R00030 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
500-sheet 8.5 x 11
(Letter) Tray
‡
500-sheet A4 Tray
‡
8.5 x 11 (Letter)
A4
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-5
AUG-APPD Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1
Printer options
(continued)
Option/Part No.
Description Comments
Lower Base
97K19160 English (Xerox)
109R00105 English (Rank Xerox)
109R00106 French
109R00107 German
109R00108 Italian
97K19330 Spanish (Xerox)
109R00109 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
250-sheet Base with
Universal Tray
109R00111 English (Rank Xerox)
109R00112 French
109R00113 German
109R00114 Italian
109R00115 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
500-sheet Base with A4 Tray
97K19170 English (Xerox)
97K19340 Spanish (Xerox)
500-sheet Base with
8.5 x 11 (Letter) Tray
†
Trays fit in either the 250-sheet Base or the Standard paper source.
‡
Trays fit in only the 500-sheet Base.
TO INSTALL, go to:
Installation instructions packaged with the option
.
The base attaches to the bottom of the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.
The base attaches to the bottom of the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.
The base attaches to the bottom of the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.
D-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPD Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Additional
Order Items
Figure D.2 shows additional items for the 4505/4505ps or
4510/4510ps you may order from your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Figure D.2
Additional order items
Type/Part No.
EP Cartridge
113R5 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Cables
Description Comments
See
Chapter 6: Maintaining the
Printer
for installation instructions.
See
Appendix A: Printer and Cable
Specifications
for cable information.
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-7
AUG-APPD Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2
Additional order items
(continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
Software Diskettes
300E62150 English (Xerox)
300E62150 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62360 French
300E62210 German
300E62460 Italian
300E62410 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62410 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
DS/P Windows 3.1 PCL5e printer drivers diskette
DOS printer drivers diskette 300E62140 English (Xerox)
300E62140 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62350 French
300E62200 German
300E62450 Italian
300E62400 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62400 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62160 English (Xerox)
300E62160 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62370 French
300E62220 German
300E62470 Italian
300E62420 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62420 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62180 English (Xerox)
300E62180 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62390 French
300E62340 German
300E62490 Italian
300E62440 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62440 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62250 English (Xerox)
300E62250 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62580 French
300E62550 German
300E62640 Italian
300E62610 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62610 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
DS/P SETUP and RUI diskette
Xerox TrueType Screen Font Pack diskette
DS/P Service Coordinator (NLM) diskette, and DS/P SMS diskette
Comments
For more information on Xerox software drivers and utilities for the printer, refer to the
Document
Services for Printing Guide
.
D-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPD Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2
Additional order items
(continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
Software Diskettes
(continued)
300K39990 English (Xerox)
300K39990 English (Rank Xerox)
300K40110 French
300K40000 German
300K40070 Italian
300K40060 Spanish (Xerox)
300K40060 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Disk Kit, containing all of the above
Macintosh PostScript printer driver diskette
300K30151 English (Xerox)
300K30151 English (Rank Xerox)
300K40100 French
300K40090 German
300K40120 Italian
300K40110 Spanish (Xerox)
300K40110 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62240 English (Xerox)
300E62240 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62710 French
300E62700 German
300E62730 Italian
300E62720 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62720 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62260 English (Xerox)
300E62260 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62270 English (Xerox)
300E62270 English (Rank Xerox)
300E64510 English (Xerox)
300E64510 English (Rank Xerox)
Windows PostScript printer drivers diskette
XNIC software DOS distribution diskette
XNIC software UNIX distribution diskette
XNIC software Lan Manager distribution diskette
Comments
For more information on Xerox software drivers and utilities for the printer, refer to the
Document
Services for Printing Guide
.
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-9
AUG-APPD Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2
Additional order items
(continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
User Documentation
720P53350 English (Xerox)
720P53350 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55350 French
720P54350 German
720P57350 Italian
720P56350 Spanish (Xerox)
720P56350 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Quick Reference
Setting Up Guide 720P53020 English (Xerox)
721P53020 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55020 French
720P54020 German
720P57020 Italian
720P56020 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56020 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53030 English (Xerox)
721P53030 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55030 French
720P54030 German
720P57030 Italian
720P56030 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56030 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53040 English (Xerox)
721P53040 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55040 French
720P54040 German
720P57040 Italian
720P56040 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56040 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720S53130 English (Xerox)
721S53130 English (Rank Xerox)
720S55130 French
720S54130 German
720S57130 Italian
720S56130 Spanish (Xerox)
721S56130 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
User’s Guide
Document Services for Printing Guide
Document kit, containing the four preceding documents
Comments
D-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPD Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2
Additional order items
(continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
User Documentation
(continued)
720P53070 English (Xerox)
721P53070 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55070 French
720P54070 German
720P57070 Italian
720P56070 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56070 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Lower Base Installation Instructions
Networking: Ethernet (XNIC-E’NET)
Installation and Configuration Guide
720P53180 English (Xerox)
721P53180 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55180 French
720P54180 German
720P57180 Italian
720P56180 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56180 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53200 English (Xerox)
721P53200 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55200 French
720P54200 German
720P57200 Italian
720P56200 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56200 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53190 English (Xerox)
721P53190 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55190 French
720P54190 German
720P57190 Italian
720P56190 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56190 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53210 English (Xerox)
721P53210 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55210 French
720P54210 German
720P57210 Italian
720P56210 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56210 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Networking: LocalTalk (XNIC-L’TALK)
Installation and Configuration Guide
Networking: Token Ring (XNIC-T’RING)
Installation and Configuration Guide
PostScript Installation Instructions
Comments
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-11
AUG-APPD Page 12 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM
D-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPE Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM
Appendix E
Environmental
Specifications
E x i d n e p p A
A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
E-1
AUG-APPE Page 2 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM
The Xerox
Commitment to
Environmental
Quality
Xerox Corporation is committed to an international program to safeguard our environment by diverting certain products and materials from the solid waste stream. We do this by reusing serviceable components and remanufacturing selected products.
To support this effort we have made it easy for you to return selected printer equipment and empty print cartridges to Xerox. We recondition the print cartridges and refill them with Xerox toner and developer. All products we manufacture meet our stringent performance standards and are backed by the same Total
Satisfaction Guarantee we offer with our newly manufactured products.
The world-wide effort to remanufacture printer equipment and recondition and reuse print cartridges benefits the environment and conserves our natural resources by reducing waste going into our landfills. Besides, it makes good business sense for Xerox and Xerox customers. Please join us in this effort.
Acoustic
Noise
Figures
(maximums)
Printing:
Warm-up:
Standby:
4505/4505ps
45.0 dB
45.0 dB
40.0 dB
4510/4510ps
50.0 dB
50.0 dB
40.0 dB
E-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPE Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM
FCC Compliance
Statement for
United States
Users
Class B:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox
Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VDE Compliance
Statement for
International Users
Canadian EME Regulations:
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.
Cet appareil numérique est conforme aux limites d’émission de bruits radioélectriques pour les appareils de Classe B stipulées dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique du Ministere des
Communications du Canada.
For Rank Xerox:
This laser printer meets the requirements of
EN5022 Class B.
European EME Regulations:
This equipment has been tested and determined to be compliant with VDE requirements for a Class B device.
A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
E-3
AUG-APPE Page 4 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM
Operational
Safety
Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental standards.
Attention to the following notes ensures the continued safe operation of your equipment.
Always
connect the equipment to a properly grounded power source receptacle. If in doubt, have the receptacle checked by a qualified electrician.
WARNING
: Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor can result in electrical shock.
Always
follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied with, the equipment.
Always
locate the equipment on a solid support surface with adequate strength for the weight of the machine.
Always
exercise care in moving or relocating the equipment.
Always
place the equipment in an area which provides adequate room area for ventilation and servicing.
Always
use the materials and supplies specifically designed for your
Xerox equipment. Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance and, possibly, a hazardous situation.
Never
use a ground adaptor plug to connect the equipment to a power source receptacle that lacks a ground connection terminal.
Never
attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this documentation.
Never
obstruct ventilation openings. These are provided to prevent overheating.
Never
install the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source.
Never
override or “cheat” electrical or mechanical interlock devices.
Never
push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.
Never
operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors.
Disconnect the power cord from the power source receptacle and contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to correct the problem.
If you need any additional safety information concerning the equipment or materials, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
E-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-APPE Page 5 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM
WARNING:
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in a hazardous radiation exposure.
This product will produce ozone during normal operation. The ozone produced is dependent on copy volume and is heavier than air.
Providing the proper environmental parameters as specified by
Xerox will ensure that concentration levels meet safe limits.
If additional information concerning ozone is needed, request the
Xerox publication (600P83222), “Ozone,” by calling in the USA
1-800-828-6571.
A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
E-5
AUG-APPE Page 6 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM
Laser Safety
WARNING
: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure.
This equipment complies with appropriate safety standards.
With specific regard to lasers, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by governmental, national, and international agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation and maintenance.
When you perform various operator functions, laser danger labels may be visible. These labels are for your dealer or service technician and are placed on or near panels, or shields, which require a tool for removal.
THESE PANELS ARE NOT TO BE REMOVED BY USERS
OF THE PRINTER. THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE AREAS
INSIDE THESE COVERS.
Laser Safety
Warning for
Finland and
Sweden
Luokitus on tehty standardin EN 60825 mukaisesti
Klassningen är gjord i enlighet met standarden EN 60 825
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksansvisning specficerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
E-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-GLOS Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Glossary
Accounting File
The file SMS generates for storing printer and job statistics.
An accounting file is created for each
Service Coordinator when DS/P Authorization is set ON in
SETUP. “PRINTER.LOG” is the name of the SMS accounting file.
Alert Message
A message SMS sends to the client that notifies user of an event at the printer.
Attach
The term used in SMS for logging into a file server.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
A digital coding system used to represent characters or control functions electronically, each character being represented by either 7 or 8 bits.
Auto emulation
See Language Sensing.
Baud rate
The data transfer rate between the computer and the printer; set only if the serial port is used. The computer and the printer must be configured at the same baud rate
(between 300 and 57.6 KB depending on the type of computer used).
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-1
AUG-GLOS Page 2 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Bindery
A data structure on each file server that shows the existence and status of printers on a Novell network.
Bit
Binary digit. The smallest unit of information in a digital computer. A bit can take on the value of either 1 or 0.
Bitmap
A pattern of bits representing the dots in a printed image.
Bitmapped fonts
Digitized images of each character in a font.
Bitmapped fonts generally require more memory than scalable fonts. If you want to change to a different size or style (like
italics
), you have to download a separate bitmapped font.
Boot
To restart a computer without turning off the power.
Also referred to as a soft start.
Byte
A unit of 8 consecutive bits. A byte is used to represent a character or control function.
CAPTURE
A Novell command used to redirect output from a client to a print queue.
Character set
The collection of characters contained in a font.
Each character set has been designed for a special purpose.
Some sets include all printable characters found on most standard computer keyboards, while others are intended for such applications as math, foreign language, typesetting, or law.
Chargeback
See User Chargeback.
Client
A PC attached to a Novell network.
Client Software
See SMS Client Software.
Configuration File
The file that stores the relationship between the SMS Service Coordinator and the printer.
“XDSP.NLM” is the name of the SMS configuration file.
GL-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-GLOS Page 3 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Context saving
See State Saving.
Controller board
The printer’s system controller, with firmware to direct all printer operations and slots for adding optional cards. The controller board is accessed through the back panel of the printer.
Control Panel
An LCD display to show status messages, prompts, and menu items; indicator lights to show the condition and status of the printer; and keys for accessing the printer settings. The Control Panel is on the face of the printer.
Data string
The term used to identify textual data—data that reads as text. SMS accounting export data files present data strings enclosed within quotation marks.
Default
A printer setting that is used in the absence of any other setting or command from the user. (See also Factory-set
Default.)
Default font
The font that the printer will use if the user or the software application does not specify otherwise.
Description
A setting the supervisor defines in the DS/P
UTILITY to specify a printer’s uniqueness. SMS users can locate a printer by its description using the Best Fit feature.
Detach
The term used in SMS for logging off a file server.
Direct-connect printer
A printer tied to a Novell network via its internal network interface card.
Document
One or more pages forming a logical whole.
DOS (Disk Operating System)
The operating system software that controls PC systems. Refer to the DOS manual packaged with your PC system.
Downloaded fonts
See Downloading.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-3
AUG-GLOS Page 4 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Downloading
The process of transferring fonts or other data from computer to the printer memory. Permanently downloaded data will be stored in the printer until it is turned off.
Dpi
Dots per inch. A measure of the resolution of a printed image. Laser printers use dots to form images. The greater the dpi, the finer the resolution.
DS/P
Document Services for Printing. The name of Xerox printer utility package comprised of SETUP, DS/P UTILITY,
RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS (Service & Management
Services), and printer drivers.
DS/P UTILITY
The software that allows NetWare supervisors to rename direct-connect printers, to assign them to SMS
Service Coordinators, and to set SMS usage parameters.
Emulation
Imitating the operational functionality of a program or language with equaling or surpassing functionality.
EP cartridge
The Xerox electronic printing cartridge that contains microfine toner and the imaging roller drum.
EPROM/ROM
Acronyms for Erasable Programmable Read
Only Memory and Read Only Memory, which describe a type of computer chip used in the printer. EPROM/ROM is where the firmware and internal fonts reside.
Error messages
1) Messages that appear on the Control Panel display when the printer has encountered some difficulty.
2) Messages sent to the SMS client when either the printer, the SMS Service Coordinator, or Novell has encountered some difficulty.
Escape character
A control code or control character represented by ASCII 27 (1B in Hexadecimal) which must be placed in front of a printer command. The Escape character
GL-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-GLOS Page 5 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
tells the printer to execute, rather than print, the character sequence following it.
Escape sequence
A sequence of characters beginning with an escape code and comprising a printer command.
Factory-set default
The settings that are programmed into the Xerox printer before it is shipped from the manufacturer.
These settings are in use unless you permanently override them using either the printer Control Panel or the Remote
User Interface. Commands from a software application temporarily override factory defaults.
File Server
A network storage device often used to store master copies of applications software. It is also used for exchanging and accessing files without having to copy them to a floppy diskette.
Firmware
The programs stored in EPROM/ROM chips on the printer’s controller board.
Font
A collection of characters with a consistent style.
Different fonts can be selected for printing. Fonts can refer to the printer’s internal fonts, or fonts stored in optional font cards or on your computer.
Font card
Small, thin credit card size electronic devices that contain fonts.
Font characteristics
Font orientation, character height, stroke weight, and typeface. What a printed font looks like.
Fuser roller
Used to bond dry ink to the page.
Handshaking
An exchange of signals between two devices in a computer network, prior to the transfer of data. The purpose of handshaking is to determine the readiness of each device to exchange data.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-5
AUG-GLOS Page 6 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Host
The source of data or the input device for the printer. It may be a personal computer or network device.
Hot Key
Keystroke combinations used to activate and exit the
DOS version of SMS.
I/O (Input/Output)
The communication between the printer and the host computer.
I/O port
Input/Output port, where data is received and transmitted.
IVD
See Integrated Visual Display
Integrated Visual Display
Also referred to as IVD, this is the user-interface portion of SMS which displays printer and job status information. It is from the IVD that the user initiates
SMS functions.
Intellifonts
Scalable fonts developed by Agfa Compugraphics and licensed to Hewlett Packard.
Internal fonts
The fonts that come with the printer, residing in permanent memory: EPROM/ROM.
Language Sensing
The ability of a port to sense the PDL
(Page Description Language) of the incoming job and then switch to that PDL if necessary.
Load balancing
An SMS accounting term used for describing the ability to generate printer usage statistics for each selected user.
Local printer
A printer that is connected to a network client through a serial or parallel cable. Only the client user has access to a local printer.
Lower base
The optional base for the 4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps printers that comes in two sizes: 250-sheet and
500-sheet.
GL-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-GLOS Page 7 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Manual tray
See MP tray.
Menu
Choices of settings and controls. There are menus for the printer’s Control Panel, RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS
(Status & Management Services), and for many software applications.
Memory
The space in a device where information is stored, or the ability of a device to keep information until needed.
(See also RAM, ROM.)
MP tray
Multipurpose tray. The MP tray comes with the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers and fits into the multipurpose paper source on the front of the printer. Also referred to as the “manual tray.”
NetWare
This is the network operating system (NOS) developed by Novell for use with its networks.
NetWare Loadable Module
Also referred to as NLM, this is a
NetWare program which runs on the network operating system.
NetWare Supervisor
A user with access to NetWare functionality and control over and above that of normal users.
For example, only users with supervisor privileges can create and delete print queues.
Network Operating System
Also referred to as NOS. The
NOS runs on the file server and serves to control the network.
Network-indirect printer
A printer connected to either: 1) a server running PSERVER.NLM or PSERVER.EXE; or 2) a network client running RPRINTER. EXE.
NIC
An abbreviation for Network Interface Card. The optional card that attaches to the controller board for interfacing with a network. (See also XNIC-E’NET,
XNIC-L’TALK, XNIC-T’RING.)
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-7
AUG-GLOS Page 8 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
NLM
See NetWare Loadable Module.
NOS
See Network Operating System.
NVM
Nonvolatile Memory. Memory that is not corrupted when power is removed, usually due to battery backup; used to store printer settings while the printer is powered off.
NVRAM
Nonvolatile Random Access Memory.
Offline
When the printer is offline, it does not accept data from the computer.
Online
When the printer is online, it is able to accept data from the computer.
Orientation
Choice of printing portrait (vertically) or landscape (horizontally) on a page.
Output tray
Where printed material is delivered. The output tray on the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps is located on the top of the printer.
Paper jam
When paper becomes wedged somewhere along the paper path.
Paper source
Paper can feed into the printer, via a paper tray or other paper feeding device. Also, the setting in a software application that specifies from where paper will feed for printing. (The paper source is mapped to a physical tray or a sequence of trays.)
Parallel port
A type of port in which data is transmitted and received in bytes rather than bits. Typically used for local printing over short distances.
Parity
The addition of one or more redundant bits of information used to verify its accuracy.
PC
Personal Computer; specifically, an IBM PC or compatible.
GL-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-GLOS Page 9 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
PCL 5e
Hewlett Packard Printer Control Language Level 5e.
PCONSOLE
A Novell utility that provides, for example, the user with the ability to create and delete queues, or to display a list of jobs currently in the print queue.
PDL
Page Description Language. The set of rules that describe a fully formatted page, independent of the device used for printing. PCL and PostScript are examples of page description languages.
Permanent fonts
Also called permanently downloaded fonts.
These are fonts set up in an application so that when the application is loaded, the fonts are downloaded to the printer’s memory. They then do not have to be downloaded for every print job. Permanent fonts remain downloaded until the printer is powered OFF.
Pitch
The number of characters to the inch (10 pitch is 10 characters per inch). Typically thought of as “horizontal” measurement.
Point
Type height is traditionally measured in points. One point is approximately 1/72 inch. Typically thought of as
“vertical” measurement.
Polling
A method to control the data coming into the printer through the I/O ports, which can include the parallel, serial, and optional network ports. The printer looks at each port in succession for incoming data, then transfers it to the print buffer where it waits for processing. The print buffer is shared among the ports, so data can arrive for different jobs continuously.
PostScript
A PDL developed by Adobe Systems in 1987.
Print density
The relative darkness of print on the page.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-9
AUG-GLOS Page 10 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Print queue
A subdirectory on the server to which print jobs are redirected. Jobs are released from the queue and sent to the printer when the printer is ready to accept jobs.
Print server
A computer system attached to a local area network that provides shared printing among network clients. The print server draws files from print queues on the file server. Typically the print server is dedicated only to that function—it is not used to run other end-user software.
Printer description
See Description.
Printer driver
A program that communicates between the printer and the software application. The printer driver interprets special format codes so the printer can print a page that matches what you created on the screen. Xerox desktop laser printers have their own printer drivers so you can take full advantage of the printer’s features.
Printer macro
Used by the page description language to send often-repeated commands and specifications, such as linefeed and carriage return information. (Printer macros are transparent to the user.)
Printer name
The default name assigned to each Xerox NIC, for example, XNExxxxxx_1, or another valid printer name the user chooses and assigns when running SETUP. See Valid
Printer Name.
Printer reset
See Reset.
Protocol
A set of rules governing the exchange of data between data processing devices.
PSERVER emulation
Software that runs on a file server or a network interface card and that enables the file server or printer to function as a print server.
Queue
See Print Queue.
GL-10
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-GLOS Page 11 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Radio button
A type of feature selection device found in the
RUI and SMS Client Software. The radio button is used for selecting one option among a group of mutually exclusive options.
RAM
Random Access Memory—read and write memory. This is commonly referred to as just “memory.” RAM is available on RAM chips and holds information that is used by the printer. The information may be discarded at the end of a print job, when you exit an application, or when the printer is reset, depending on what kind of information it is: incoming data for printing, downloaded soft fonts or printer macros for the current PDL.
Reset
To restore the printer to all or some of its default settings.
ROM
Read-Only Memory.
RPRINTER emulation
Software run on a client PC (connect to a network-indirect printer) or a Xerox network interface card that identifies the printer as a remote printer.
RUI
Remote User Interface. The RUI is a DS/P component that runs on a PC and allows the user to select printer settings from the PC rather than at the printer’s Control Panel.
Scalable fonts
Fonts described by formulae that produce a font outline. The formulae can be used to scale the font up or down (by point size).
SDF
See Standard Data File.
Serial port
A type of port in which data is transmitted and received in bits rather than bytes. Typically used for printing over longer distances.
Server
A special-purpose computer system (typically a PC using a 80386 or 80486 CPU, or another processor based on
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-11
AUG-GLOS Page 12 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
the Motorola 68000 CPU) that is connected to the local area network and controls shared peripherals (PCs, printers, etc.).
Service Coordinator
The NLM portion of SMS that obtains job and status information from direct-connect printers and reports it to users running SMS Client Software. The Service
Coordinator also acquires and stores accounting data generated by the printer assigned to it during SETUP. (The relationship between the printer and the Service Coordinator is stored in the Configuration File.)
SIMM
Single Inline Memory Module. A SIMM has several connected memory chips and connects to a slot on the printer controller board to increase the available RAM on the printer.
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers have two SIMM slots and will accept SIMMs with 4 MB or 16 MB of memory, running at 70 ns (nanoseconds).
SMS
Status & Management Services. A DS/P component that resides on the client PC and the file server. SMS features include, but are not limited to, the ability to view the status of various network printers and jobs in their queue, find the best printer for the job, and generate accounting reports.
SMS Client Software
The Integrated Visual Display (IVD) portion of SMS the end-user runs on the PC.
Spooling
A portion of memory (in this case on the printer) that will hold documents to be processed by the printer. This frees up the computer to go on with other work.
Stand-alone
Not connected, directly or indirectly, to a network. A stand-alone printer is connected to a PC through a serial or parallel cable.
Standard Data File
A data file format that can be read by many software applications. SDF files contain data elements delimited by any special character, typically the comma. Each logical record in an SDF file is terminated by a carriage
GL-12
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-GLOS Page 13 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
return. SMS accounting export data files are stored in SDF format.
State Saving
A PCL Menu option that enables you to save permanent fonts and macros when jobs switch between PCL and PostScript.
String
See Data String.
Supervisor
See NetWare Supervisor.
Temporary fonts
These are PCL fonts downloaded with a particular print job and cleared from memory when the job is finished.
Toner
A dry powdered substance used in the printing process. The toner supply for the printer is contained in the recyclable EP (electronic printing) cartridge.
TrueRes Smoothing
A PCL capability that smooths curves in text and graphics to improve print quality.
TrueType fonts
A font standard developed by Apple
Computer as an alternative to Adobe Postscript. TrueType fonts are scalable and can print in both PostScript and PCL page description languages.
TSR
Terminate and Stay Resident. The SMS TSR is a program that is loaded into the PC’s memory each time the user starts the PC. The SMS TSR is responsible for routing status information to the IVD, and displaying alert messages on the client’s monitor.
Typeface
The design of a set of characters and symbols—all uppercase and lowercase letters, arabic numerals, and common punctuation and symbols. Typefaces often bear the name of the person who designed them, like Bodoni and
Garamond.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-13
AUG-GLOS Page 14 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM
Universal paper tray
Called “universal” because it adjusts to a variety of paper sizes.
User chargeback
An SMS accounting term defining the ability to generate user printing costs typically calculated by multiplying the number of pages printed by the cost-per-page value.
Valid printer name
A printer name that does not begin with the letters “DSP” and that terminates with the characters
“_1”.
XNIC-E’NET
Xerox Network Interface Card-Ethernet. (See also NIC.)
XNIC-L’TALK
Xerox Network Interface Card-LocalTalk. (See also NIC.)
XNIC-T’RING
Xerox Network Interface Card-Token Ring.
(See also NIC.)
GL-14
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-IX Page 1 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
Index
A
Adjusting print density 6-12
Auto Continue option
System Menu
3-59
Auto Job End option also see
Port Timeout option
Ethernet Menu
3-53
Parallel Menu
3-43
Serial Menu
3-47
Token Ring Menu 3-56
B
Baud Rate option
Serial Menu
3-48
Bidirectional option
Parallel Menu 3-44
Bitmapped fonts
4-3
C
Cable specifications A-7
Cancel PS Job function
Reset Menu 3-66
Chime option
System Menu
3-58
Cleaning see
Printer maintenance
Config. Sheet function
Test Menu 3-62
Configuration Sheet
3-14, 3-62,
7-7
Context saving, see
State
Saving option
3-28
Control Panel
Display 3-4
Indicator Lights, see
Control
Panel indicator lights
Keys, see
Control Panel keys
Location
1-3
Menu options
3-12 to 3-66
Messages 7-5 to 7-18
Navigating 3-8 to 3-11
Overview
3-3
Control Panel indicator lights
3-5
Form Feed
3-5
Online
3-5
Ready
3-5
I n d e x
❖
IX-1
AUG-IX Page 2 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
D
Control Panel keys
3-6 to 3-7
Down
3-7
Enter
3-7
Esc 3-7
Form Feed 3-6
Menu
3-6
Online
3-6
Reset
3-6
Up
3-7
Copies option
PCL Menu
3-19
PostScript Menu
3-32
D
Data Bits option
Serial Menu 3-49
Default Source option
PCL Menu
3-21
Default Tray option
PostScript Menu
3-32
Defaults option
System Menu
3-60
Deutsch option
Language
3-14
Documentation
D-10
Down key
3-7
Downloading fonts 4-13 to 4-15
Drilled paper
Loading
2-20
DTR Polarity option
Serial Menu
3-48
E
Emulation, see
Lang. Sensing option, State
Saving option
English option
Language
3-14
Enter key
3-7
Envelopes
Loading
2-21
EP cartridge
Recycling
6-3
Replacing 6-3 to 6-8
Esc key
3-7
Español option
Language 3-14
Ethernet Menu
3-51 to 3-53
Options
3-51 to 3-53
Auto Job End
3-53
Frame Type
3-53
Lang. Sensing
3-52, 4-9
Port Timeout 3-51
System Language 3-51
F
Flow control, see
Handshake option
Font Number option
PCL Menu 3-20
Font Source option
PCL Menu
3-19
Fonts
Adobe PostScript (Type 1)
4-9
Bitmapped 4-3
Definition 4-3
Downloading
1-5, 4-13 to 4-15
Font card
4-4, 4-10
Installing
5-19 to 5-20
Slot location
1-3
Font Family 4-3
Intellifont 4-7
PCL bitmap
4-8
Permanently downloaded
4-14
Printer
4-4
Scalable
4-3
Screen 4-4
TrueType 4-6
Form Feed indicator 3-5
Form Feed key
3-6
Form Length option
PCL Menu
3-24
Frame Type option
Ethernet Menu
3-53
Français canad. option
Language 3-14
Français option
Language
3-14
Front Cover
Location
1-3
IX-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-IX Page 3 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
Fuser cleaning cycle
Procedure
6-9 to 6-10
Fuser Cleaning function
Test Menu
3-64
H
Handshake option
Serial Menu
3-48
Hex Dump option
System Menu
3-58
I
Intellifont Fonts
4-7
Interface network A-14 parallel
A-7 serial
A-10, A-12
Interface Menu
3-37 to 3-56
Ethernet Menu, see
Ethernet Menu
LocalTalk Menu, see
LocalTalk Menu
Parallel Menu, see
Parallel Menu
Serial Menu, see
Serial Menu
Token Ring Menu, see
Token Ring Menu
Italiano option
Language
3-14
J
Jam Recovery option
Effect on memory
3-68
PCL Menu
3-26
PostScript Menu
3-35
L
Labels
Loading
2-20
Lang. Sensing option
Ethernet Menu
3-52
Parallel Menu
3-42
Serial Menu 3-46
H
Language
Options
Deutsch
3-14
English 3-14
Español 3-14
Français
3-14
Français canad.
3-14
Italiano
3-14
Portuguése (BRA)
3-14
Letterhead
Loading
2-20
LocalTalk Menu
3-50
Option
3-50
Port Timeout
3-50
Lower base
2-13
Lower source
Location
2-4
Lower tray
2-13
Loading paper 2-14 to 2-17
Location
2-8
M
Main Menu system
3-12 to 3-66
Interface Menu, see
Interface Menu
PCL Menu, see
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu, see
PostScript Menu
System Menu, see
System Menu
Test Menu, see
Test Menu
Maintenance see
Printer maintenance
Manual Size option
PostScript Menu 3-34
Memory
Adding, see
SIMM, Installing
Maximum capacity
1-6
Overview 1-6
Memory Check function
Test Menu
3-64
Menu key 3-6
Modem, null
A-14
MP Tray Size option
PCL Menu
3-23
Multipurpose (MP) source
Location
2-4
I n d e x
❖
IX-3
AUG-IX Page 4 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
N
Multipurpose (MP) tray
N
O
Default Source option
3-21
Feeding paper
2-18 to 2-19
Location 1-3, 2-8
Manual Size option 3-34
MP Tray Size option
3-23
Tray Switching option
3-33
Network interface
Network ports
Location
1-3
Null modem A-14
A-14
Online indicator
3-5
Online key
3-6
2-11 to 2-12
Options
5-2, D-2
Ordering information
D-1
Orientation option
PCL Menu 3-23
Output tray
Capacity
2-5
Location
1-3, 2-5
P
Page Protection option
Effect on memory
3-67
PCL Menu
3-26
Paper
Feeding, see
Paper feeding
Input sources
2-4
Input trays
2-8
Jams
2-5, 2-28, 3-6, 3-26, 3-35, 3-68, 7-19 see also
Jam Recovery option
Output tray
2-5
Output tray capacity 2-5
Size
2-6
Weight
2-6
Paper feeding
Multipurpose (MP) tray
2-18 to 2-19
Paper jams
7-19
Paper loading
Drilled paper
2-20
Envelopes
2-21
Labels 2-20
Letterhead 2-20
Lower tray
2-14 to 2-17
Standard tray
2-14 to 2-17
Paper Size option
PCL Menu 3-23
Paper sources
Lower
Location
2-4
Multipurpose (MP)
Location
2-4
Selecting 2-22 to 2-34
PCL paper sources 2-22
Printing a page
2-23 to 2-24
Source mapping settings
2-26 to 2-27
Standard
Location
2-4
Paper trays
250-sheet capacity
2-9, 2-13
500-sheet capacity
2-13
Lower
2-13
Location
2-8
Multipurpose (MP) 2-11 to 2-12
Location
2-8
Output
Location
2-5
Standard
2-9 to 2-10
Location
2-8
Parallel interface
A-7
Parallel Menu
3-41 to 3-44
Options
3-41 to 3-44
Auto Job End
3-43
Bidirectional
3-44
Lang. Sensing 3-42, 4-9
Port Enable
3-41
Port Timeout
3-41
System Language
3-41
Transfer Rate
3-44
Parallel port
Location 1-3
Parity option
Serial Menu
3-49
PCL Font List function
Test Menu
3-63
IX-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
AUG-IX Page 5 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
R
PCL language, see
System Language option
PCL Menu
3-15 to 3-28
Options 3-18 to 3-28
Copies
3-19
Default Source
3-21
Font Number
3-20
Font Source
3-19
Form Length
3-24
Jam Recovery 3-26
MP Tray Size
3-23
Orientation
3-23
Page Protection
3-26
Paper Size
3-23
Pitch
3-20
Point Size 3-21
Resolution
3-27
Source Mapping
3-22
State Saving
3-28
Symbol Set
3-25
TrueRes
3-27
Pitch option
PCL Menu 3-20
Point Size option
PCL Menu
3-21
Port Enable option
Parallel Menu 3-41
Serial Menu 3-45
Port Timeout option also see
Auto Job End option
Ethernet Menu
3-51
LocalTalk Menu 3-50
Parallel Menu
3-41
Serial Menu
3-45
Port Type option
Serial Menu
3-47
Ports
Network
Location
1-3
Parallel
Location
1-3
Serial
Location 1-3
Portuguése (BRA) option
Language
3-14
PostScript fonts 4-9
PostScript language, see
System Language option
PostScript Menu
3-29 to 3-36
Options
3-32 to 3-36
Copies
3-32
Default Tray 3-32
Jam Recovery 3-35
Manual Size
3-34
Print Errors
3-34
Resolution
3-35
State Saving
3-36
Tray Switching 3-33
TrueRes 3-35
Power outlet
Location
1-3
Power Saver option
System Menu 3-60
Power Switch
Location
1-3
Pre-printed stationery, see
Letterhead
Print density adjusting
6-12
Print Density option
System Menu
3-59
Print Errors option
PostScript Menu 3-34
Print quality problems
7-29
Printer maintenance
Cleaning the printer
6-13
EP cartridge replacement
6-3 to 6-8
Fuser cleaning 6-9 to 6-10
Moving the printer
6-14
Printer operational problems 7-26
PS Font List function
Test Menu
3-63
R
Ready indicator
3-5
Remote User Interface 1-4
Reset All function
Reset Menu
3-66
Reset I/f Cards function
Reset Menu
3-66
Reset key
3-6
I n d e x
❖
IX-5
AUG-IX Page 6 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
S
Reset Menu
3-65 to 3-66
Functions
3-65 to 3-66
Cancel PS Job
3-66
Reset All 3-66
Reset I/f Cards 3-66
Reset Menus
3-66
Reset Printer
3-66
Reset Menus function
Reset Menu 3-66
Reset Printer function
Reset Menu
3-66
Resolution option
Effect on memory
3-68
PCL Menu 3-27
PostScript Menu
3-35
RUI 1-4
S
Scalable fonts
4-3
Serial interface
RS-232C A-10
RS-422A
A-12
Serial Menu 3-45 to 3-49
Options
3-45 to 3-49
Auto Job End 3-47
Baud Rate
3-48
Data Bits
3-49
DTR Polarity
3-48
Handshake
3-48
Lang. Sensing
3-46, 4-9
Parity 3-49
Port Enable
3-45
Port Timeout
3-45
Port Type
3-47
Stop Bits
3-49
System Language
3-45
Serial number
Locating 7-4
Serial port
Location
1-3
SIMM
Capacity 5-2
Definition 5-2
Installing
5-4 to 5-18
Source Mapping option
PCL Menu
3-22
IX-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Specifications, cable
A-7
Standard source
Location 2-4
Standard tray
2-9 to 2-10
Loading paper
2-14 to 2-17
Location
2-8
State Saving option
Effect on memory 3-68
PCL Menu
3-28
PostScript Menu
3-36
Stop Bits option
Serial Menu
3-49
Symbol Set option
PCL Menu
3-25
System Language option
Ethernet Menu
3-51
Parallel Menu
3-41
Serial Menu
3-45
Token Ring Menu 3-55
System Menu
3-57 to 3-60
Options
3-58 to 3-60
Auto Continue
3-59
Chime
3-58
Defaults 3-60
Hex Dump
3-58
Power Saver
3-60
Print Density
3-59
System Messages
3-58
System Messages option
System Menu 3-58
T
Test Menu 3-61 to 3-64
Functions
3-62 to 3-64
Config. Sheet
3-62
Fuser Cleaning 3-64
Memory Check
3-64
PCL Font List
3-63
PS Font List
3-63
Test Print
3-63
Test Print function
Test Menu 3-63
Timeout, see
Port Timeout option
AUG-IX Page 7 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
Token Ring Menu
3-54 to 3-56
Options
3-54 to 3-56
Auto Job End
3-56
Lang. Sensing 4-9
System Language 3-55
Toner, see
EP cartridge
Transfer Rate option
Parallel Menu
3-44
Tray Switching option
PostScript Menu
3-33
Troubleshooting
7-1 to 7-36
Before calling service
7-2
Control Panel messages
7-5
Locating serial number 7-4
Operational problems 7-26
Paper jams
7-19
Print quality problems
7-29
TrueRes option
PCL Menu 3-27
PostScript Menu
3-35
TrueType fonts 4-6
Type 1 fonts, see
PostScript fonts
U
Up key
3-7
U
I n d e x
❖
IX-7
AUG-IX Page 8 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM
IX-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
advertisement
Key Features
- 600 dpi and 300 dpi resolutions for sharp, clear prints
- Print speed of five pages per minute for quick and efficient printing
- Monthly page volume of up to 10,000 pages for high-volume printing needs
- Compact size and sleek design for easy placement in any workspace
- Easy-to-use control panel with intuitive menu system for simple operation
- Variety of paper handling options for printing on different paper sizes and types
- Optional font card for expanding printing capabilities with additional fonts
- PCL and PostScript printing languages for compatibility with a wide range of software applications
Frequently Answers and Questions
What is the print resolution of the Xerox 4505/4505ps?
How fast is the Xerox 4505/4505ps?
How many pages can the Xerox 4505/4505ps print per month?
What paper sizes can the Xerox 4505/4505ps handle?
Can I add more fonts to the Xerox 4505/4505ps?
What printing languages does the Xerox 4505/4505ps support?
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 2 Notice
- 3 Table of Contents
- 7 Introduction
- 8 Overview
- 9 Printer Components
- 10 Factory Settings
- 11 Sharing the Printer
- 12 Memory Considerations
- 13 Handling Paper
- 15 Overview
- 16 Paper Input
- 17 Paper Output
- 18 Paper Specifications
- 20 Paper Trays
- 21 Standard Tray
- 23 Multipurpose Tray
- 25 Optional Lower Base
- 26 Loading Paper
- 26 Loading the Standard or Lower Paper Tray
- 30 Feeding the Multipurpose Paper Tray
- 32 Loading Letterhead Pre-printed, Drilled or Label Paper
- 33 Loading Envelopes
- 34 Selecting a Paper Source
- 34 PCL Paper Sources
- 35 Printing a Page
- 37 Source Mapping Settings
- 38 Factory Source Mapping Settings
- 39 Source Mapping Examples
- 47 Using the Control Panel
- 49 Overview
- 50 Control Panel Features
- 50 The Display
- 51 The Indicator Lights
- 52 The Keys
- 54 Navigating the Menu System
- 55 Menu System Indicators
- 56 Setting a Menu Option
- 58 Main Menu System
- 60 Language
- 60 Language Options
- 61 PCL Menu
- 61 PCL Menu Hierarchy
- 64 PCL Menu Options
- 75 PostScript Menu
- 76 PostScript Menu Hierarchy
- 78 PostScript Menu Options
- 83 Interface Menu
- 87 Parallel Menu Options
- 91 Serial Menu Options
- 96 LocalTalk Menu Options
- 97 Ethernet Menu Options
- 100 Token Ring Menu Options
- 103 System Menu
- 103 System Menu Hierarchy
- 104 System Menu Options
- 107 Test Menu
- 107 Test Menu Hierarchy
- 108 Test Menu Functions
- 111 Reset Menu
- 111 Reset Menu Hierarchy
- 111 Reset Menu Functions
- 113 Printer Settings that Affect Memory
- 115 Minimum Memory Requirements
- 117 Using Fonts
- 119 Overview
- 119 Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts
- 120 Where Fonts Reside
- 121 Fonts Resident on the Printer
- 122 TrueType Fonts
- 123 Intellifont Fonts
- 124 PCL Bitmap Font
- 125 Adding Fonts
- 125 PostScript
- 126 Font Cards
- 127 Fonts within Software Applications
- 128 Selecting a Font
- 129 Downloading Fonts
- 129 Temporary and Permanent Fonts
- 133 Adding Printer Options
- 134 Overview
- 136 Installing a SIMM
- 151 Installing a Font Card
- 153 Maintaining the Printer
- 154 Overview
- 155 Replacing the EP Cartridge
- 161 Fuser Cleaning Cycle
- 164 Adjusting the Print Density
- 165 Cleaning the Printer
- 166 Transporting the Printer
- 167 Troubleshooting
- 168 Overview
- 168 Before Calling for Service
- 170 Locating Your Printer Serial Number
- 171 Displayed Control Panel Messages
- 185 Paper Jams
- 187 Clearing Paper Jams from the Standard Tray or Lower Base
- 191 Clearing Paper Jams from the MP tray
- 192 Printer Operational Problems
- 195 Print Quality Problems
- 203 Printer and Cable Specifications
- 204 4505 and 4505ps Printer Specifications
- 206 4510 and 4510ps Printer Specifications
- 209 Cable Specifications
- 209 Parallel Interface
- 212 RS-232C Serial Interface (CCITT V.24)
- 214 RS-422A Serial Interface (CCITT V.11 and X.27)
- 216 Null Modem
- 216 Network Interface
- 217 Printer Commands (Escape Sequences)
- 219 PCL Printer Commands
- 237 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands
- 241 Control Codes
- 243 I/O Port Polling
- 247 Ordering Information
- 248 Printer Options
- 253 Additional Order Items
- 259 Environmental Specifications
- 260 The Xerox Commitment to Environmental Quality
- 260 Acoustic Noise Figures (Maximums)
- 261 FCC Compliance Statement for United States Users
- 261 VDE Compliance Statement for International Users
- 262 Operational Safety
- 264 Laser Safety
- 264 Laser Safety Warning for Finland and Sweden